Proposed Project for the Manufacture of Pesticides (Aluminium … · 2019-03-08 · EIA-EMP Report for Proposed Project for the Manufacture of Pesticides (Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc

Environmental Impact Assessment & Environmental Management Plan

For

Proposed Project for the Manufacture of Pesticides

(Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide

Technical)

At

Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam,

District - Valsad, Gujarat

Plot Area: 2351.25 m2 (0.2351 hector)

Production capacity : 500TPM

Proposal No.: IA/GJ/IND2/75429/2018

[ToR Letter Dated: 22nd July, 2018] [Study Period: 1st October 2018 to 31st December 2018]

[Schedule 5(b), Category–A as per EIA Notification 2006, amended till date]

APPLICANT CONSULTANT

Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam, Ta: Umbergaon, District- Valsad 396155, Gujarat.

E-mail: [email protected]

Tel No: +919227236524

Eco Chem Sales & Services

Office floor, Ashoka Pavilion ’A’

New Civil Road, Surat, 395001

(NABET Accredited-NABET/EIA/1417/ SA 2 002)

E-mail: [email protected]

Tel No: +912612231630

January – 2019

2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034

mailto:[email protected]

EIA-EMP Report for Proposed Project for the Manufacture of Pesticides (Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide Technical) at Sarigam GIDC, Valsad

Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat

Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034

Declaration Page ii

DECLARATION

Declaration by experts contributing to the EIA Report for Proposed Project for the

Manufacture of Pesticides (Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide

Technical) at Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam, District - Valsad,

Gujarat by Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. “I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team

in the following capacity that developed this Report”.

EIA COORDINATOR

Name : Jagdish Rathi

Signature & Date :

Sector No. : 17

Period of

involvement

: May 2018 to January, 2019

Contact Information : Eco Chem Sales & Services, Office Floor, Ashoka Pavilion-A,

Opp. Kapadia Health Club, New Civil Road, Surat, India-395

001 Landline No.: +91-261-2231630

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTS

Functional Areas Name of

the Expert

Involvement (Period & Task) Signature & Date

Land Use

(LU)

Joshua Anand

Period of Involvement:

October 2018 – December 2018

Tasks:

Supervision in development of land use maps of study area using GIS /

related tools, site visit for ground truth survey, finalization of land use maps,

contribution to EIA documentation

Air Pollution Prevention,

Monitoring & Control

(AP)

Rekha shah


May 2018 – January, 2019

Tasks:

Selection of monitoring locations, Supervision of air quality monitoring,

Identification of impacts on Air quality, suggesting mitigation measures and contribution to EIA documentation

Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling &

Prediction

Priyanka Verma



Tasks:




Declaration Page iii


the Expert


(AQ) Evaluation of meteorological data with collected secondary data, modeling

and prediction, identification of impacts, finalization of mitigation measures and contribution to EIA

documentation

Water Pollution Prevention, Control

& Prediction of Impacts

(WP)

Rekha shah



Tasks:

Water Balance, Water demand, Adequacy of ETP, Treatment

Technology, Resource Conservation, Mitigation Measures, EMP for water

pollution and report preparation

Ecology and Bio-diversity

Conservation (EB)

Dipti Patel



Tasks:

Site visit and conduct of ecological survey, assessment of the impacts of

proposed project activities on the biological environment and

contribution to EIA documentation

Noise & Vibration (NV)

Dipti Patel



Tasks:

Checking of noise sampling results, analysis of data, identification of

impacts and mitigation measures, and contribution to EIA documentation

Socio-economic (SE)

Ghanshyam

Patel



Tasks:

Site visit and collection of secondary and primary from the surrounding

area/villages of the proposed project. for impact identification and mitigation

measures for incorporating to EIA documentation

Hydrology, Ground Water and Water

Conservation (HG)

Rekha shah



Tasks:

Site visit, Understanding and representing groundwater conditions, supervision of groundwater sampling,

finalization of survey findings, identification of impacts, suggestion of mitigation measures and contribution

to the EIA documentation

Geology

(GEO)

Ravikant Sharma

Not involved as Functional Area is rationalized as per QCI Scheme for

Accreditation Version 3 --




Declaration Page iv


the Expert


Soil Conservation (SC)

B. K. Patel

Not involved as Functional Area is rationalized as per QCI Scheme for

Accreditation Version 3 --

Risk Assessment & Hazard

Management (RH)

Nilesh Jogal


October 2018 – December 2018

Tasks:

Identification of impacts & mitigation measures, safety during construction

and operational phase and contribution to EIA documentation

Solid waste and Hazardous Waste

Management (SHW)

Jagdish Rathi



Tasks:

Identification of waste generated from the site, studying adequacy of

mitigation measures for management of hazardous waste and contribution

to EIA documentation




Declaration Page v

Declaration by the Head of the Accredited Consultant Organization:

I, Rekha Shah, hereby, confirm that our experts prepared the EIA report of Proposed Project

for the Manufacture of Pesticides (Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc Phosphide, Magnesium

Phosphide Technical) Located at Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam,

District - Valsad, Gujarat by Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. I also confirm that I shall be fully

accountable for any misleading information mentioned in this statement. It is certified that no

unethical practice like „Copy and Paste‟, and used external data/text without proper

acknowledgement, while preparing this EIA Report”.

Signature :

Name : Rekha Shah

Designation : CEO

Name of the EIA Consultant Organization :

ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICES

Office Floor, Ashoka Pavillion – A, Opp.

Kapadia Health Club, Surat – 395 001

NABET Certificate Number :

NABET/EIA/1720/ RA 051, Valid up to

February 03, 2020.




Declaration Page vi


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content vii

CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT ................................................................................ 1

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT ................................ 1

1.2.1 Identification of Project ..................................................................................... 1

1.2.2 Project Proponent ............................................................................................ 1

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT AND ITS IMPORTANCE TO THE

COUNTRY & REGION ...................................................................................................... 2

1.3.1 Brief Description of the Project ......................................................................... 2

1.3.2 Importance to the Country and the Region ....................................................... 2

1.4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK ............................................................................... 2

1.4.1 Scope and methodology of the study ............................................................... 2

1.4.2 Statutory Clearance as Other Permissions ...................................................... 3

1.4.3 Approved ToR for EIA study by EAC ............................................................... 4

1.5 Structure of the EIA report .................................................................................... 15

2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 16

2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT ............................................................................................. 16

2.2 NEED FOR THE PROJECT .................................................................................. 16

2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT ............................................................................ 16

2.3.1 General Location of the Site ........................................................................... 16

2.3.2 Approach to the Project Site .......................................................................... 19

2.3.3 Site Details .................................................................................................... 19

2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION ............................................................. 21

2.4.1 Production Capacity and transportation details .............................................. 21

2.4.2 Cost of the Project ......................................................................................... 22

2.5 ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES REQUIRES BY OR FOR THE PROJECT ................. 22

2.5.1 Utilities ........................................................................................................... 22

2.5.2 Power ............................................................................................................ 23

2.5.3 Water ............................................................................................................. 23

2.5.4 Manpower ...................................................................................................... 24

2.6 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION ................ 24

2.7 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION ................................................. 25


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content viii

2.7.1 Manufacturing Technology ............................................................................. 25

2.7.2 Raw Material details ....................................................................................... 29

2.7.3 Storage Facilities ........................................................................................... 30

2.7.4 Details of Air Pollution and APCM .................................................................. 34

2.7.5 Design Specifications of APCM:..................................................................... 34

2.7.6 Fugitive Emission & Control Measures........................................................... 35

2.7.7 Odour Control Measures ................................................................................ 36

2.7.8 Noise pollution ............................................................................................... 36

2.7.9 Water Consumption, Waste Water Generation & Disposal Details ................. 37

2.7.10 Solid and Hazardous Waste Identification, Quantification, Storage and

Disposal 40

2.7.11 Project Layout and Components .................................................................... 40

2.7.12 Mitigation Measures at Design Stage ............................................................. 43

2.7.13 Assessment of New and Untested Technology .............................................. 45

2.7.14 Condensed Description .................................................................................. 45

3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ................................................................... 47

3.1 Baseline Study Area and Period ........................................................................... 47

3.2 METHODOLOGY.................................................................................................. 48

3.2.1 Frequency of Sampling .................................................................................. 48

3.2.2 Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis .......................................... 49

3.3 MICROMETEOROLOGY ...................................................................................... 51

3.3.1 Temperature .................................................................................................. 52

3.3.2 Humidity ......................................................................................................... 52

3.3.3 Wind Speed and Wind Direction .................................................................... 54

3.3.4 Wind Rose ..................................................................................................... 54

3.3.5 Interpretation of Micrometeorological Data ..................................................... 56

3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................ 56

3.4.1 Selection of Sampling Locations .................................................................... 56

3.4.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling ....................................................... 57

3.4.3 Methodology for Sampling and Analysis ........................................................ 58

3.4.4 Quality of Ambient Air .................................................................................... 58

3.4.5 Summary of Ambient Air Quality .................................................................... 59

3.4.6 Interpretation of Ambient Air Quality Data ...................................................... 60


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content ix

3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................................... 60

3.5.1 Sources of Noise Pollution ............................................................................. 60

3.5.2 Noise Level in the Study Area ........................................................................ 60

3.5.3 Summary of Noise Data ................................................................................. 63

3.5.4 Interpretation of Noise Data ........................................................................... 63

3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT ......................................................................................... 63

3.6.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study area ............................................................... 63

3.6.2 Summary and Interpretation of Land Use Map ............................................... 66

3.7 GEOLOGY ............................................................................................................ 66

3.8 HYDROGEOLOGY ............................................................................................... 66

3.9 Traffic Study.......................................................................................................... 67

3.9.1 Interpretation of Traffic Study ......................................................................... 68

3.10 SOIL QUALITY ..................................................................................................... 68

3.10.1 Summary of Soil Data .................................................................................... 70

3.10.2 Interpretation of Soil Data .............................................................................. 70

3.11 WATER ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................... 70

3.11.1 Reconnaissance ............................................................................................ 71

3.11.2 Water Quality ................................................................................................. 71

3.11.3 Sampling and Analysis ................................................................................... 71

3.11.4 Ground Water ................................................................................................ 71

3.11.5 Summary of Ground Water Quality ................................................................ 76

3.11.6 Interpretation of Ground Water Quality Data .................................................. 76

3.11.7 Surface Water ................................................................................................ 76

3.11.8 Summary of Surface Water Quality ................................................................ 79

3.11.9 Interpretation of Surface Water Quality Data .................................................. 79

3.11.10 Marine water .............................................................................................. 80

3.11.11 SUMMARY OF MARINE WATER QUALITY .............................................. 82

3.11.12 INTERPRETATION OF MARINE WATER QUALITY DATA ....................... 82

3.12 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY .......................................................................... 82

3.12.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study of Flora and Fauna ................................ 83

3.12.2 Floral Diversity of the Study Area ................................................................... 83

3.12.3 Interpretation of Ecology and Biodiversity ...................................................... 88


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content x

3.13 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT .................................................................. 88

3.13.1 Socio-Economic Survey Methodology ............................................................ 89

3.13.2 Demography .................................................................................................. 89

3.13.3 Population Density ......................................................................................... 89

3.13.4 Sex Ratio ....................................................................................................... 91

3.13.5 Literacy Rate.................................................................................................. 93

3.13.6 Economic Aspects ......................................................................................... 96

3.13.7 Amenities ....................................................................................................... 99

3.13.8 Interpretation of Socio Economic Data ......................................................... 100

3.14 Summary ............................................................................................................ 101

4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES ........ 103

4.1 INVESTIGATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DUE TO THE PROPOSED

PROJECT ..................................................................................................................... 103

4.1.1 Investigated Environmental Impacts Due to the Proposed Project ............... 104

4.1.2 Air Environment ........................................................................................... 107

4.1.3 Noise Environment....................................................................................... 119

4.1.4 Water Environment ...................................................................................... 122

4.1.5 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management ................................................... 125

4.1.6 IMPACTS ON LAND ENVIRONMENT ......................................................... 127

4.1.7 Ecology & Biodiversity Environment ............................................................. 129

4.1.8 Socio Economic ........................................................................................... 130

4.1.9 Health and safety (RH) ................................................................................ 133

4.2 IMPACT ON TRAFFIC ........................................................................................ 135

5 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES ................................................................................ 137

5.1 SITE ALTERNATIVES ........................................................................................ 137

5.2 TECHNOLOGY ALTERNATIVES ....................................................................... 137

6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ......................................................... 139

6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM .................................................. 139

6.1.1 Air Environment ........................................................................................... 139



6.1.4 Land Environment and Solid and Hazardous Waste Management ............... 144

6.1.5 Ecology & Biodiversity Environment ............................................................. 145


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xi

6.1.6 Traffic Management Plan ............................................................................. 146

6.2 SOCIO ECONOMIC ............................................................................................ 147

6.2.1 Social Welfare & Upliftment Plan ................................................................. 147

6.2.2 Environmental Monitoring and Management Cost ........................................ 148

7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES ............................................................................................. 150

7.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION .................................................................................. 150

7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT .......................................................................................... 151

7.3 Hazard identification ........................................................................................... 151

7.3.1 Storage Details & Layout ............................................................................. 151

7.3.2 Layout map .................................................................................................. 152

7.3.3 Chemical Properies...................................................................................... 152

7.4 QUALITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT .................................................................. 153

7.4.1 Conclusion ................................................................................................... 158

7.5 CONTROL / MITIGATION MEASURES .............................................................. 158

7.5.1 General Safety Measures for Construction Phase ....................................... 158

7.5.2 Safety Measures for Transportation, Storage and Handling of Chemicals .... 159

7.5.3 Occupational Health and Safety ................................................................... 164

7.6 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN (DMP) .......................................................... 165

7.6.1 Structure ...................................................................................................... 165

7.6.2 Policy ........................................................................................................... 165

7.6.3 Planning ....................................................................................................... 165

7.6.4 Setting up of Emergency Infrastructure ........................................................ 174

7.6.5 Occupational Health and Safety Programme ............................................... 176

7.7 Socio Economic ................................................................................................. 177

8 PROJECT BENEFITS ................................................................................................ 178

8.1 IMPROVEMENTS IN THE PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE .............................. 178

8.2 IMPROVEMENTS IN THE SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE ................................... 178

8.2.1 Education ..................................................................................................... 178

8.2.2 Water (Drinking Water Facilities) .................................................................. 178

8.2.3 Health .......................................................................................................... 178

8.2.4 Employment Avenues .................................................................................. 178

8.3 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL SKILLED; SEMI-SKILLED AND UNSKILLED ....... 178


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xii

8.4 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS .......................................................................... 179

9 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS ....................................................... 180

9.1 PROJECT COST AND APPRAISAL ................................................................... 180

9.2 APPLICABILITY OF CBA AND SUMMARY ........................................................ 180

10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ............................................................ 181

10.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EMP) .............................................. 181

10.1.1 Objectives of EMP ....................................................................................... 181

10.1.2 Environment Management Plan ................................................................... 181

10.2 ENVIRONMENT AMELIORATION ...................................................................... 186

10.2.1 Green Belt Development .............................................................................. 186

10.2.2 Concept of Waste Minimization, Recycle, Reuse / Recover, Energy

Conservation and Natural Resource Conservation ..................................................... 188

10.2.3 RAIN WATER HARVESTING SCHEME ...................................................... 189

10.3 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH OF WORKERS ........................................................ 189

10.3.1 Noise ........................................................................................................... 189

10.3.2 Heat ............................................................................................................. 189

10.3.3 Dust, other Chemicals and Metals being suspended in the Environment ..... 190

10.3.4 Occupational Hazards specific Pre-Placement and Periodical Health Checkup

190

10.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL ......................................................... 190

11 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION ............................................................................ 191

11.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................ 191

11.1.1 Proposed Project ......................................................................................... 191

11.1.2 Air Emissions & Control ............................................................................... 191

11.1.3 Wastewater Treatment &Disposal ................................................................ 191

11.1.4 Hazardous& Other Solid Waste ................................................................... 192

11.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT .......................................................... 192

11.2.1 Study Period, Area & Monitoring/Sampling Locations .................................. 192

11.2.2 Land Use and Land Cover ........................................................................... 192

11.2.3 Micro Meteorology ....................................................................................... 192

11.2.4 Ambient Air Quality ...................................................................................... 193

11.2.5 Noise Level .................................................................................................. 193

11.2.6 Soil Quality .................................................................................................. 193


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xiii

11.2.7 Groundwater Quality .................................................................................... 194

11.2.8 Surface water Quality ................................................................................... 194

11.2.9 Marine water Quality .................................................................................... 194

11.2.10 Ecology and Biodiversity .......................................................................... 195

11.2.11 Socio Economic ....................................................................................... 195

11.3 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ........................................................... 195

11.3.1 Air Environment ........................................................................................... 195



11.3.4 Land Environment ........................................................................................ 196

11.3.5 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management ................................................... 196

11.3.6 Biological Environment ................................................................................ 196

11.3.7 Green Belt Development .............................................................................. 197

11.3.8 Socio-Economic Environment ...................................................................... 197

11.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN ........................................................... 197

11.5 ADDITIONAL STUDIES ...................................................................................... 197

11.5.1 Socio Economic Development Activities ...................................................... 197

11.5.2 Risk Assessment ......................................................................................... 197

11.6 PROJECT BENEFITS ......................................................................................... 198

11.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN......................................................... 198

11.8 CONCLUSION .................................................................................................... 198

12 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ....................................................................... 200

12.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 200

12.2 BRIEF RESUME AND NATURE OF CONSULTANCY ....................................... 200

12.3 TEAM MEMBER FOR EIA REPORT .................................................................. 200

12.4 LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING AND OTHER

ANALYSIS ..................................................................................................................... 201


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xiv

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1-1: Identification of the Project as per EIA notification ................................................ 1

Table 1-2: Identified Applicable Statutory .............................................................................. 3

Table 1-3: Compliance with the Terms of Reference ............................................................. 4

Table 2-1: Schedule and category as per EIA notification ................................................... 16

Table 2-2: Location Details and Project Site Specific Environmental Sensitivity Details ...... 19

Table 2-3: Proposed Production Capacity ........................................................................... 22

Table 2-4: Capital Cost Projection ....................................................................................... 22

Table 2-5: Utility List............................................................................................................ 23

Table 2-6: Equipment and Machinery List ........................................................................... 23

Table 2-7: Power and Fuel Requirement ............................................................................. 23

Table 2-8: Water requirement details .................................................................................. 24

Table 2-9: Manpower Details .............................................................................................. 24

Table 2-10: Proposed Schedule for Approval and Implementation ...................................... 24

Table 2-11: Mass Balance of Aluminium Phosphide ........................................................... 26

Table 2-12: Mass Blanace of Zinc Phosphide ..................................................................... 27

Table 2-13: Mass Blanace of Magnesium Phosphide .......................................................... 28

Table 2-14: Raw material for Technical grade ..................................................................... 29

Table 2-15: Storage Details................................................................................................. 31

Table 2-16: Flue Gas Emissions ......................................................................................... 34

Table 2-17: Process Gas Emissions ................................................................................... 34

Table 2-18: Specification of P2O5 Scrubbing System ........................................................... 34

Table 2-19: Sources of Noise with their Sound Pressure Levels ......................................... 37

Table 2-20: Water Consumption & Wastewater Generation ................................................ 37

Table 2-21: Wastewater generation, treatment and disposal details .................................... 38

Table 2-22: Design paramters of Effluent Treatment Plant .................................................. 39

Table 2-23: Effluent Treatment Scheme .............................................................................. 39

Table 2-24: Solid and hazardous Waste details .................................................................. 40

Table 2-25: Area breakup ................................................................................................... 40

Table 2-26: Details of Mitigation Measures at Design Stage ............................................... 43

Table 2-27: Details of Condensed Description .................................................................... 45

Table 3-1: Frequency of Environmental Monitoring ............................................................. 48


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xv

Table 3-2: Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis ............................................... 49

Table 3-3: Meteorological Condition of Study Area ............................................................. 51

Table 3-4:Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations in the Study Region ............................ 57

Table 3-5:Details of Analysis Method .................................................................................. 58

Table 3-6: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of PM10 and PM2.5 .................... 58

Table 3-7: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of SO2 and NOx .......................... 59

Table 3-8: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of CO .......................................... 59

Table 3-9:Noise Monitoring Locations in the Study Region ................................................. 61

Table 3-10: Noise Monitoring report during day time ........................................................... 61

Table 3-11: Noise Monitoring report during night time ......................................................... 62

Table 3-12: Land use Statistics (10 km) .............................................................................. 65

Table 3-13:Traffic Study Report .......................................................................................... 67

Table 3-14: Existing Traffic Scenario with respect to LOS ................................................... 67

Table 3-15: Details of Soil sampling location ....................................................................... 69

Table 3-16:Soil Sample Analysis Result .............................................................................. 69

Table 3-17: Details of Ground Water sampling locations ..................................................... 72

Table 3-18: Ground water Analysis Results ........................................................................ 74

Table 3-19:Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations .................................................... 77

Table 3-20: Surface water Analysis Results ........................................................................ 77

Table 3-21:Bacteriological Analysis of surface Water .......................................................... 78

Table 3-22:Standard limit as per IS 10500:2012 for Microbiological parameters ................. 78

Table 3-23:Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations .................................................... 80

Table 3-24: Marine Water Analysis Result .......................................................................... 80

Table 3-25:Microbiological Analysis Report for Marine Water Sample ................................ 81

Table 3-26: Zooplankton Analysis Report for Marine Water Sample ................................... 81

Table 3-27:Pigment Analysis and Phytoplankton cell count for Marine Water ..................... 81

Table 3-28: Benthos Details ................................................................................................ 81

Table 3-29: Sediment Quality Analysis ................................................................................ 82

Table 3-30: Trees in the Study area .................................................................................... 83

Table 3-31:List of Shrubs in the study area ......................................................................... 84

Table 3-32:List of Herbs in the study area ........................................................................... 85

Table 3-33: List of Climbers in the study area ..................................................................... 86


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xvi

Table 3-34: List of Mammals in the Study area ................................................................... 86

Table 3-35:List of Domestic animal in the Study area .......................................................... 86

Table 3-36: List of Birds in the Study area ........................................................................... 86

Table 3-37: List of Reptiles in the Study area ...................................................................... 87

Table 3-38: List of Invertebrates in the Study area .............................................................. 88

Table 3-39:Details of Fishes................................................................................................ 88

Table 3-40: Details of Population in Study Area .................................................................. 89

Table 3-41: Details of Sex Ratio in Study Area.................................................................... 91

Table 3-42: Details of Literacy Rate in Study Area .............................................................. 93

Table 3-43:Details of Occupational Structure ...................................................................... 96

Table 3-44:Education Facilities ........................................................................................... 99

Table 3-45: Health Care Facilities ....................................................................................... 99

Table 3-46:Drinking Water Facilities .................................................................................... 99

Table 3-47: Sanitation Facilities .......................................................................................... 99

Table 3-48:Communication Facilities .................................................................................. 99

Table 3-49:Transportation Facilities .................................................................................... 99

Table 3-50: Road Facilities ............................................................................................... 100

Table 3-51: Bank Facilities ................................................................................................ 100

Table 3-52: Power Supply Facilities .................................................................................. 100

Table 4-1: Severity Criteria for Magnitude of Impacts ........................................................ 103

Table 4-2: Score ranges for Beneficial and Adverse Impacts ............................................ 104

Table 4-3: Aspect-Impact Identification from Proposed Project ......................................... 104

Table 4-4: Criteria of Significance / Consequence ............................................................. 107

Table 4-5: Proposed Stack Emission ................................................................................ 110

Table 4-6: Proposed Vent Emission & APCM ................................................................... 110

Table 4-7: 24 hourly average incremental increase in GLC – Flue gas stacks & vents ..... 114

Table 4-8: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Air Environment........................... 116

Table 4-9: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Noise Environment ...................... 119

Table 4-10:Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Water Environment .................... 122

Table 4-11: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Solid and Hazardous Waste

Management ..................................................................................................................... 125

Table 4-12: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Land Environment ..................... 128

Table 4-13: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Ecology& Biodiversity ................ 129


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xvii

Table 4-14: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Socio Economic ........................ 132

Table 4-15: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Health and safety ...................... 133

Table 5-1: Alternative for technology and other parameter ................................................ 137

Table 6-1: Environmental Monitoring Program for Air Environment ................................... 140

Table 6-2: Environment Monitoring Program for Noise Environment ................................. 142

Table 6-3: Environmental Monitoring Program for Water Environment .............................. 143

Table 6-4: Land Environment and Solid and Hazardous Waste Management ................... 144

Table 6-5: Manamgeent of Ecology and biodiversity Envieoronment ............................... 145

Table 6-6: Traffic Monitoring Program ............................................................................... 146

Table 6-7: Budget Break-up for CER Activities of 5 years ................................................. 147

Table 6-8: Summary of Environmental Monitoring Program .............................................. 148

Table 6-9: Capital Cost for Environmental Management System ...................................... 149

Table 6-10: Recurring/operating Cost Per Annum Environmental & Safety Management

System .............................................................................................................................. 149

Table 7-1: Chemical Storage Details ................................................................................. 151

Table 7-2: Physico-chemical properties of Chemicals ....................................................... 152

Table 7-3: Risk Matrix for Qualitative Risk Assessment .................................................... 154

Table 7-4: Risk Acceptability Criteria ................................................................................. 154

Table 7-5: Hazard Identification and Risk Assesement ..................................................... 155

Table 7-6: Emergency Types ............................................................................................ 166

Table 7-7: On-Site Emergency Planning ........................................................................... 167

Table 10-1: Environmental Management Plan .................................................................. 182

Table 10-2: List of plant species for Plantation in LIZ Area ................................................ 186

Table 10-3: Greenbelt Development Plan ......................................................................... 186

Table 10-4: Budget for Additional Greenbelt outside premises / Habitat Improvement

Programme ....................................................................................................................... 188

Table 10-5: Rainwater harvesting calculations .................................................................. 189

Table 12-1: EIA Team Member ......................................................................................... 200


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xviii

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 2-1: Aluminium Phosphide Flow Diagram ................................................................. 26

Figure 2-2: Zinc Phosphide Flow Diagram .......................................................................... 27

Figure 2-3: Magnesium Phosphide Flow Diagram .............................................................. 28

Figure 2-4: P2O5 Scrubbing system ..................................................................................... 35

Figure 2-5: Water Banlance Diagram .................................................................................. 38

Figure 2-6: Flow Diagram of Proposed Effluent Treatment Plant ......................................... 39

Figure 3-1: Graphical Presentation for the month wise Temperature Variation .................... 52

Figure 3-2: Graphical Presentation for the month wise Humidity Variation .......................... 53

Figure 3-3:Wind Rose Diagram ........................................................................................... 55

Figure 3-4:Methodology used for Land use Classification ................................................... 64

Figure 3-5: Land use Statistics (10 Km) .............................................................................. 65

Figure 3-6:Graph of Literacy Rate ....................................................................................... 95

Figure 3-7: Details of Occupational Structure ...................................................................... 98

Figure 4-1: Isopleth for Incremental GLC of Oxides of Sulphur (SO2) from Flue Gas Stack111

Figure 4-2: Isopleth for Incremental GLC of Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) from Flue Gas Stack

......................................................................................................................................... 112

Figure 4-3: Isopleth for Incremental GLC of P2O5 from Reactor Vent ................................ 113

Figure 7-1: Emergency Organization Chart ....................................................................... 169

Figure 7-2: Emergency Organizational Chart .................................................................... 171

Figure 10-1: Organogram of Environmental Management Cell .......................................... 190


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xix

LIST OF MAPS

Map 2-1: Map Showing Location of Project Site .................................................................. 17

Map 2-2: Project site marked on Google Earth .................................................................... 18

Map 2-3: Study Area Map ................................................................................................... 20

Map 2-4:Site map with Green Belt Development Planning .................................................. 42

Map 3-1: Study Area Map ................................................................................................... 47

Map 3-2: Map showing the Study Region location of Ambient Air........................................ 57

Map 3-3: Map showing the study region location of Noise ................................................... 61

Map 3-4:Land Use Map ....................................................................................................... 64

Map 3-5:Map showing the study region location of Soil ....................................................... 68

Map 3-6: Map showing the study region with locations for Ground Water ........................... 72

Map 3-7: Map showing the locations for Surface water ....................................................... 77

Map 3-8: Map showing the locations for Marine water ......................................................... 80

Map 7-1: Layout Plan Showing Storage Facilities ............................................................. 152


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xx

LIST OF PHOTOGRAPHS

Photograph 2-1: Photographs of Project site ....................................................................... 21

Photograph 3-1: Photograph Showing The Sampling Activity .............................................. 49


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Table of Content xxi

LIST OF ANNEXURES

Annexure 1:ToR Letter ...................................................................................................... 203

Annexure 2: Land Allotment Letter .................................................................................... 211

Annexure 3: Letter Regarding the Unit is Located in Notified Industrial Area ..................... 212

Annexure 4: GIDC Water Permission Letter ...................................................................... 214

Annexure 5: Raw dfata of Ambient Air Modeling ............................................................... 215

Annexure 6: Undertaking regarding No manufacturing of Banned Pesticide product. ........ 218

Annexure 7: Environmnet Policy ....................................................................................... 219

Annexure 8: List OF MSDS ............................................................................................... 220

Annexure 9:Raw Data of Ambient Air ................................................................................ 297


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxii

ABBREVIATIONS

AAQM - Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

AERMOD- AMS/EPA Regulatory Model

AMS- American Meteorological Society

AP/AQ- Air Pollution/ Air Quality

APCM- Air Pollution Control Measures

APHA- American Public Health Association

ARC/GIS- Arc geographical Information System

AWH- Air Water & Hazard Waste

AWMA- American Waste Management Association

BEIL- Bharuch Enviro Infrastructure Limited

BLEVE - Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapor Explosion

C&D- Construction and Demolition

CBSE- Central Board Secondary Education

CC&A- Consolidated Consent & Authorization

CEO- Chief Executive Officer

CGWA-Central Ground Water Authority

CO -Carbon Monoxide

CPCB- Central Pollution Control Board

CPCB-Central Pollution Control Board

Cr.: Cores

CTE: Consent to Establish

CTO- Consent to Operate

D.G- Diesel Generator

DALR -Dry Adiabatic Lapse Rate

DGVCL- Dakshin Gujarat Vij Co. Ltd.


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxiii

DIC- Deputy Incident Controllers.

Dist.- District

DMP- Disaster Management Plan

Doc.- Document

EC -Environmental Clearance

ECC - Emergency Control Center

EC-Environmental Clearance

EER - Evacuate, Escape and Rescue Plan

EHS - Environment, Health and Safety

EIA- Environmental Impact Assessment

ELCB -Earth-Leakage Circuit Breaker

ELR - Environment Lapse Rate

EMP - Environmental Management Plan

EMS- Environment Management System

EPA- Environment Protection Act

EPRG -Emergency Response Planning Guidelines

ERDAS- Earth Resource Development Assessment System

ERPG - Emergency Response Planning Guidelines

ETP- Effluent Treatment Plant

FAE- Functional Area Expert

FFE Firefighting Equipment‟s

GIDC - Gujarat Industrial Development Corporation

GLC- Ground Level Concentration

GOI- Government of India

GW- Ground Water

HAZCHEM- Hazardous Chemical Code

HAZOP- Hazard and Operability Study


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxiv

HIRA- Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment

HSE- Health Safety and Environment

HW- Hazardous Waste

IC- incident controller

IDLH - Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health

IMD- Indian Meteorological Department

IS- Indian Standards

ISO-International Organization for Standardization

KLD- Kilo Liter Per Day

KVA- kilo-volt-ampere

LEL - Lower Flammability Limits

LOS- Level of Serviceability

LU/LC- Land Use/ Land Cover

MCA- Maximum Credible Accident

MCB-Miniature Circuit Breaker

MCLS - Maximum Credible Loss Scenarios

MCLS- Maximum Credible Loss Scenarios

MoEF&CC- Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change

MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheet

MSIHC - Manufacture, Storage, Import & Hazardous Chemical Rules

MTPA- Million Tons Per Annum

NABL- National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

NIHL- Noise Induced Hearing Loss

NOC-No Objection Certificate

Nox- Oxides of Nitrogen

NRSA- National Remote Sensing Agency


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxv

NRSC- National Remote Sensing Centre

NRV- Non- return Valve

NV-Noise and Vibration

OGP- Oil and Gas Producers

OHC- Occupational Health Centre

OHS- Occupational Health Center

OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PCU-Passenger Car Unit

PEL - Permissible Exposure Limits

PHAST- Process Hazard Analysis Software Tool)

PM- Particulate Matter

PPE- Personal Protective Equipment

PPEs- Personnel Protective Equipment

QC-Quality Control

QMS- Quality Management System

QRA- Quantitative Risk Assessment

R&D- Research and Development

RCC- Reinforced Cement Concrete

RD- Resource Depletion

RPE- Respiratory protective equipment

SCBA- Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus

SEIAA- State Environment Impact Assessment Authority

SMC - Site Main Controller

SO2- Sulphur Dioxide

SOP- Standard Operating Procedure

SS- Stainless Steel

STEL- Short Time Exposure Limit


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxvi

SW- Surface Water

TL- Tank Lorry

TL- Threshold Limit

TLV - Threshold Limit Value

TOC- Total Organic Carbon

ToR - Terms of References

TPA – Ton Per Annum

TPH- Tones per Hour

TPM- Tones Per Month

TREM card - Transport Emergency Card

TREM- Transport Emergency Cards

TSDF - Treatment, Storage and Disposal facility

UEL- Upper Explosion Limit

UFL - Upper Flammable Limits

USEPA- United Stated Environment Protection Act

V/C-Volume/ Capacity

VEC's- Valuable Environment Components

VOC- Volatile Inorganic Carbon


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxvii

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

I. Project Name and Location

Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. proposes to establishe green field Technical grade pesticides

manufacture plant for Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide

Technical locted at Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam, District - Valsad,

Gujarat.

II. Products & Capacities, If expansion proposal then existing products

with capacities and reference to early EC.

Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd is new project.

S. No.

Product/s Quantity Unit Mode of

transportaion

1 Aluminium Phosphide / Zinc Phosphide /

Magnesium Phosphide Technical 500 TPM Road

III. Requirement of Land, Raw Material, Water, Power, Fuel with Source of

supply

Sr. no. Particulars Description

1. Total plot area m2 2351.25

2.

Fresh Water requirement (KL/day) 6.5

Source of water GIDC water supply

3. Power requirement (KVA) 125

Source of Power Dakshin Gujarat Vij Co. Ltd.

4. Manpower requirement

(Nos.)

75

5. Capital investment (Lakhs) 600

6. Steam Boiler TPH 0.2

7. Steam requirement (kg/h) 200

8. Cooling Tower, TR 300

9. Coal (kg/hr) 500

10. D. G set (KVA) 100

11. HSD (kg/hr) 15

IV. Process Description in brief and raw material specifically indication the

gaseous emission, liquid effluent and solid/hazardous waste:

The Company is manufacturing of pesticides with latest available process technology for the

production.

1. Aluminium Phosphide: Aluminium powder along with saw dust and graphite powder is

fed in the reaction pot. The lid is placed on the pot and is taken for mixing. Yellow

Phosphorus is then added gradually into reaction pot, keeping the inert gas blanketing and

stirring. After the proper mixing is done, reaction pot is taken to the reaction chamber, where

the reaction is carried out by removing inert blanketing. The Phosphorus is converted into

P2O5 producing heat up to 600°C which is used to start Aluminium Phosphide reaction. The

P2O5 generated during the reaction is scrubbed with water to form Phosphoric Acid. The


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxviii

Phosphoric Acid thus generated is re-circulated at scrubber to get higher concentration of

Phosphoric Acid [H3PO4]. The tail gas scrubber is provided to scrub residual gas before

discharging to atmosphere through stack. After natural cooling, reacted mass is wax coated

in the rod mil and then formulated in the ribbon blender to convert Aluminium Phosphide in

powder form for the packing.

2. Zinc Phosphide: Zinc dust/Zinc dross is taken into the reactor. Phosphorous is added

gradually at control condition. The reaction between Zinc Dust & Phosphorous takes place in

the reaction vessel to form Zinc Phosphide which is an exothermic reaction. After natural

cooling, reacted mass is wax coated in the rod mil and then formulated in the ribbon blender

to convert Zinc Phosphide in powder form for the packing.The reacted Phosphorous is

converted into P2O5 which is scrubbed in absorption tower to form Phosphoric Acid as a

byproduct.

3. Magnesium Phosphide: Magnesium powder is mixed with Red Phosphorus is presence

of groundnut oil to give Technical Magnesium Phosphide (86%). P2O5 generated during the

reaction is scrubbed with water to give H3PO4 acid as a byproduct. Technical Magnesium

Phosphide is then dilute with ingredients like Paraffin Wax, MR 17, T.G.Urea, Zinc Stearate

and Graphite to give required Magnesium Phosphide with 66%.This magnesium Phosphide

is then sent for either tableting or directly for pouch packing.

V. Measures for mitigating the impact on the environment and mode of

discharge or Disposal:

The following will be monitored on a regular basis during operation phase to ensure that a

high level of environmental performance is maintained:

Ambient air monitoring of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and P2O5 will be carried out during the

operational phase within site premises and nearby villages, location of downwind

direction, and once every season.

Groundwater sample from site or nearby location once every season

Post project sampling and effect on baseline data generated during construction and

operation;

The general effectiveness of pollution control measures shall also be monitored

VI. Capital Cost of the Project, Estimated time of completion:

Proposed project cost will Rs. 600 lakh. Project will be commissioned within 6 to 8 months

after receipt of EC.

VII. Site selected for the project- Natural of land – Agricultural (Single/double

crop), barren, Govt./Private land, status of is acquisition, nearby (in 2-3

km) water body, Population, with in 10 km other industries, forest. Eco-

sensitive zones, accessibility.


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxix

Sr. No.

Environmental Sensitivity Name Distance & Direction

1 Nearest City Vapi 1.90 km in NW

2 Nearest Highway SH- 5 3.86 km SE

3 Nearest River Takor River 1.3 Km towards S

4 Other River Kalu River 4.92 Km towards E

5 Nearest National Highway NH-8 (Surat-Mumbai) 4.65 Km, towards SE

6 Nearest Airport Daman Airport 16.2 Km towards N

7 Nearest Railway station Bhilad Railway Station 4.66 Km towards E

8 State/U.T National Boundaries Daman 3.30 km in W

9. WLS/ESA/ESZ Dadra & Nagar Haveli WLS 13.3 km in SW direction

10. Archeological Site Moti Mahal Fortwalls 13.5 km in N direction

VIII. Baseline environmental data – Air quality, Surface and Ground water

quality, Soil characteristic, Flora and Fauna, Socio-Economic condition

of the nearby population.

1. Ambient Air Quality

i. PM10 61.9 – 86.1 µg/m3

ii. PM2.5 32.0 – 47.1 µg/m3

iii. SO2 9.4 – 17.6 µg/m3

iV. NOx 16.2- 23.0 µg/m3

V P2O5 <9.03

All results have been found within the NAAQ Standard Limit

2. Noise Level Monitoring

i. Day Time (06:00 AM to 10:00 PM)

50.2 – 77.1 dB (A)

ii. Night Time (10:00 PM to 06:00 AM)

42.1 – 73.5 dB (A)

The observed noise levels are meeting the acceptable norms.

3. Soil Quality and Characteristics

i. pH 7.56 to 7.82

ii. electrical

Conductivity 0.86 to 1.18 dS/m

iii. Sodium 4.5 to 6.6 meq/100g

iV. Nitrogen 0.030 to 0.056 meq/100g

V. Phosphorous 9.8 to 19.0 meq/100g

4. Ground Water

i. pH 7.14 – 7.28

ii. TDS 602-924 mg/L

iii. Alkalinity 292-502 mg/L

iV. Total

hardness 384-584 mg/L


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxx

V. Chloride 148-202 mg/L

5. Surface water

i. pH 7.96-8.02

ii. TDS 186 - 354 mg/L

iii. DO 4.7 - 4.9 mg/L

iV. COD 10 - 20 mg/L

V. BOD 4 - 6 mg/L

Marine Water

On the basis of test results it is interpreted that water quality of marine is as per expectation

and suitable for sustaining the aquatic life. Presence of certain bio indicators indicate that

water is being contaminated with sewage or industrial discharge. Organic load is not more

than the self-purification capacity.

Ecology and Biodiversity

Different species of flora were observed among which Mango and Chickoo species were

dominant, as the soil of the study region also support for the cultivation of same. Herbal

species were observed rarely. Looking to the density of plant it may also be suggested to

improve the quality of environment by planting more trees. Due to destruction of natural

habitat, less numbers of wild mammals were observed. Number of species and density of

wild mammals can be increased by promoting/ facilitating the growth of bush. There was no

endangered species observed during primary survey.

Socio economic

During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available in all

villages within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 54.06 to 86.98%. On

the basis of survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote

educate more and more people. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-

workers. It indicates that the problem of unemployment can be solved by providing proper

training and education. There is also need to establish more industries so that maximum

number of employment can be generated. Basic amenities like Education facilities Health

care facilities, water supply, electric power supply, mode of transportation etc. are available

in all villages.

IX. Identification of hazards in handling processing and storage of

hazardous material and safety system provided to mitigate the risk.

S. No. Process Or

Activity

Associated Health & Safety Impact (Risk)

Control / Mitigation Measures

Hazards

A Hazard involving during Construction Phase


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxxi

S. No. Process Or

Activity



Hazards

1. Site Clearance, excavation and paving of site

Dust generation & increase in

SPM/RSPM in air

Fall into pit due to caving the side

Health effect on workers and surrounding

People

Risk of injury to workers

Water spray on the ground before excavation.

Work permit procedure to be followed.

Shoring of the sides while manual is digging the ground.

Use of dust mask.

2.

Fabrication work for

erecting major plant

equipment including

operation of equipment like crane, concrete

mixtures, vibrators etc.

and preventive maintenance

work

Noise generation


People.

Ear plugs will be provided / and use ensured. Grinding

will be carried out in a closed shed area to thick greenbelt will be developed to reduce the noise level going outside

factory premises

3.

Vehicular movement for transportation of construction

material

Emission of PM10, HC, NOx, & CO

Noise generation

Health effect

Risk of injury to workers due to

accidents

P.U.C Certified Vehicles

Regular Maintenance of Vehicles

Speed control of the vehicles.

B Storage and Handling of Red Phosphorus

1 Loading & Unloading

Fire Explosion due to leakage /spillage in

pipe/container/ valves etc. if contact with

heat/sparks/open flames/hot surfaces

Skin/Eye irritation.

Toxic Vapor inhalation etc.

Safety glasses with side-shields conforming to EN166

for Eye Protection.

Use proper glove removal technique (without touching

glove's outer surface) to avoid skin contact with this product

for skin Protection.

Flame retardant antistatic protective clothing, for body

Protection.

Store in cool place. Keep

container tightly closed in a dry and well-ventilated place.

C Storage and Handling of yellow Phosphorus

1 Handling / Charging


pipe/container/ valves etc. if

Eye irritation and respiratory disorder.

Inspection of Bags/Barrel.


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxxii

S. No. Process Or

Activity



Hazards

contact with heat/sparks/open

flames/hot surfaces

Use of eye goggle & nose mask.

D Manufacturing of Zinc Phosphide

1

Mixing of Yellow

Phosphorus and zinc

Powder into closed reactor.

Generation of P2O5


People.

Scrubber is installed to avoid releasing of P2O5 into the

environment and treated as Phosphoric Acid.

Eye irritation and respiratory

disorder

Appropriate PPEs like Safety Goggles, Butyl or Nitrile rubber gloves, gumboot,

plastic apron etc. will be used.

E Manufacturing of Magnesium Phosphide

1

Mixing of Magnesium

Phosphate and Magnesium

ground nut Oil MgO into

reaction pot.

Generation of P2O5


People.




disorder



F Storage and Handling of Phosphine

Charging of Zinc Oxide,

Red phosphorus,

Yellow Phosphorus.

Releasing of Phosphine gas.


People.

Keep away from heat, hot surfaces, sparks, open flames and other ignition sources. No

smoking. Use only non-sparking tools.


disorder

Select eye protection in accordance with OSHA 29

CFR 1910.133.

Likely impact of the project on Air, Water, Land, Flora-fauna nearby

population:

Air Environment


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxxiii

The maximum 24 hourly average GLC‟s for NOx is observed to be 3.91 µg/m3.

These GLC‟s are expected to occur at a distance of 50 m from the source towards

the SW direction.

The maximum 24 hourly average GLC‟s for P2O5 is observed to be 0.0088 µg/m3.


the West direction.

The maximum 24 hourly average GLC‟s SO2 for is observed to be 0.0046 µg/m3.


the SW direction

Noise Environment

Due to the proposed activities the noise will be generated from Vehicular movement and

heavy fabrication work, mainly noise generating source are Compressors, Pumps and

vehicular movement for products transportation during operation phase for raw material and

products transportation during operation phase. This noise will be very negligible.

Where this is not possible, control measures in the form of use of suitable PPE (ear muffs or

ear plugs) will be provided.

Water Environment

Surface Water: The proposed unit does not involve disposal of effluent on Land directly.

Generated waste water will be treated into ETP, first waste water will be collected, pH will

be balanced and then the wastewater will be filtered and utilized for scrubber. Thus there will

be no discharge of any industrial effluent.

The domestic wastewater generated will be disposed off into soak pits / septic tanks.

Land Environment

Land clearance will be done leading to removal of top soil which will be used for greenbelt

management.

Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

Excavation and paving activity involve for proposed project will be utilized for leveling of low

lying area. The scraps generated during fabrication will be given to scrap vendors.

During operation phase the ETP waste Will be disposed off into TSDF, Vapi through SIA,

Sarigam, Used oil Will be sold to Registered re-processers and Discarded containers Will be

sold to authorized recycler

Biological Environment

Removal of common site specific floral species from project site will not have significant or

permanent impact on the habitat structure of associated faunal diversity.

As the emissions from the plant are regulated and minimal with respect to the specified

norms, and with a very healthy greenbelt proposed at the site in the form of several species,

it then follows that the biological environment will be protected.

Green Belt Development


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxxiv

The total greenbelt area will be 500 m2. Plantation will be carried out around periphery of the

project site. Considering, greenbelt area, project site will have plantation of around 125 trees

and 20 shrub of local species like Bel, Neem, Shesham, Peepal etc. Plantation will be

carried out in around periphery and within the project site.

Socio-Economic Environment

Assessment of socio-economic and sociological impact including health impacts to

surrounding population. The proposed activities shall generate indirect employment in the

region due to the requirement of workers in trail making, supply of raw material, auxiliary and

ancillary works, which would marginally improve the economic status of the people.

X. Emergency preparedness plan in case of natural or in plant emergencies:

On Site Emergency Preparedness Plan

The main objective of the plan is to take immediate actions to meet any emergency for speedy and efficient rescue and relief operations. The major steps during an onsite emergency plan are described below:

Effect the rescue and Medical treatment of casualties.

Safeguard other people.

Minimize damage to property and the environment.

Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control.

Identify any dead.

Provide authoritative information to the news media.

Provide for the needs of relatives.

Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area.

Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent enquiry into the cause and circumstances of the Emergency.

XI. Issues raised during public hearing (if applicable) and response given:

Public hearing is not applicable.

XII. CSR/ESC/CER Budget:

Budget of CER is Rs. 12 Lakh.

XIII. Occupational Health Measures:

Safety Training is being/will be provided to the employees.

Assembly points are being/will be defined for safe gathering of the employees during

the time of emergency.

Mock drills are /will be periodically conducted and factors like response time shall be

evaluated.

First Aid Facility and training is being/will be provided.

Personal protective equipment is being/will be provided to employees.

Health checkups are /will be organized at regular intervals.

Safety / Health records are being/will be maintained

XIV. A capital Budget of Rs. 10 Lakhs and Rs. 5 Lakhs/Annum as recurring cost has

been allocated for Occupational Health and Safety. Appropriate PPEs will be made

available readily for workers.

XV. Post Project Monitoring Plan Sr. No Important Monitoring Particulate Monitoring Duration of


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxxv

Parameters Frequency Sampling

Air Pollution

1 SO2, NOx /

As per CC&A

Selected locations in and around plant site specified by GPCB

As per CC&A 24 hr

continuously

2 SO2, NOx PM10 , PM 2.5 ,

HC, CO/ As per CC&A

Stack gas analysis in all stacks.

As per CC&A One time

3 SPM / As per CC&A

Fugitive dust sampling (if any) at work zone

as per CPCB or GPCB.

As per CC&A 8 hourly

Water and Wastewater Quality

A Industrial/Domestic

As per CC&A

Waste water from

operational activity

Daily/ As per CC&A

24 hr

B

Water quality in the study area

i. Parameters specified

under IS:10500

Surface Water Half yearly/ As per CC&A

Grab

ii. Water levels and

chemistry of water

Water level studies in well

or bore wells in plant and

surrounding areas

Yearly / As per CC&A

Once

iii. As per norms Marine water/hot water Yearly/ As per CC&A

Once

iv. As per CC&A Major noise generating

sources at plant site

Every fortnight/ As per CC&A

24 hr.

continuous

v. As per CC&A Along Road for

transportation noise

Fortnight/ As per CC&A

24 hr.

continuous

Ambient Noise Levels

1 Noise level in dB(A) 4 Locations Fortnight/ As per CC&A

24 hr

Continuous with 1 hr

interval

Soil Characteristics

1 Selected locations in core and buffer zone in nearby area

Half Yearly/ As per CC&A

One Grab

sample

2 Work

Zone / Dust, Noise, etc.

At plant site Yearly Once in

work place

3 Corporate

Environmental

Responsibility

In core and buffer zone in

nearby villages

Half Yearly Once

4 Occupational Health

Surveillance/ Employee health register

At plant premises Half Yearly Once

5 Greenbelt development/ Trees, survival rate,

landscape area.

Number of plantation

(Units), Number of

Survived Plants/ Trees,

Number of Poor Plant/

Trees

yearly once


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Abbreviations xxxvi

6 Environmental audit As per Directions of

Honorary High Court

Yearly/ As per GPCB

once

7 Consents

and

Authorization

Consent to Operate under

applicable acts

Renewing 90

days before

expiry of

validity

once

8 Compliance of EC

Conditions

Submission of 6 monthly Compliance

Reports

June and

December

Twice in a

Year/ As per EC conditions


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Chapter 1 1

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. proposes to established green field Technical grade pesticides


Technical located at Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam, District - Valsad,

Gujarat.

The purpose of this report is to identify environmental aspects, impacts and mitigation

measures arising from the proposed project and to prepare EIA report as per Terms of

Reference (ToR) issued by Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, New Delhi

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT

1.2.1 Identification of Project

The proposed project by M/s Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. will be a small scale unit to be

located in a notified industrial area with total plot area 2351.25 m2. The proponent proposes

to manufacture

Aluminium Phosphide/ Zinc Phosphide / Magnesium Phosphide technical with total

capacity of 500 TPM

As per the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated 14th September 2006

and its amendment thereafter, the proposed project falls in „Category A„ under project activity

5(b).

Table 1-1: Identification of the Project as per EIA notification

Project or Activity Category Proposed Products*

5 (b) Pesticides industry and pesticide specific intermediates (excluding

formulations) A

Aluminium Phosphide / Zinc Phosphide / Magnesium Phosphide Technical: 500

TPM

* Detailed Production capacity is provided inTable 2-3.

1.2.2 Project Proponent

M/s. Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd., established in 2018, is managed by the promoters and

whole time Managing Director Mr. Bhargav Desai. He sets and evolves the strategic

direction for the company and its portfolio of offerings. While nurturing a strong leadership

team to drive its execution, Mr. Bhargav Desai has more than decade of experience of the

pesticides manufacturing industry with a strong track record for executing business

turnarounds and manufacturing.

He holds Bachelor degrees in Commerce from South Gujarat University, Surat.



Mr. Rohan Trivedi, as Director of the Company, drives and oversees the continuous renewal

of key processes, system and policies across the company in client relationship

management sales effectiveness, delivery excellence, quality, talent management and

leadership development. He has over a decade of experience in fumigation industry. He has

transformed M/s Shri Sai Pest Control from a small household local pest control agency to a

complete service provider for the exports related services like fumigation, lashing, belting,

etc.

Firm‟s strength is commitment, best quality, timely delivery at best price. Firm is always

engaged in R&D, quality control, marketing, production, logistics, import and export. Senior

personnels are available for providing support to the manufacturing unit in the areas of

technology, R&D, manufacturing, quality control and quality assurance.

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT AND ITS

IMPORTANCE TO THE COUNTRY & REGION

1.3.1 Brief Description of the Project

M/s Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. proposes to set up a plant for the manufacturing of

“Pesticides” which are used for stored grain insects and pests. The product will be used for

domestic and quarantine fumigation only.

The project is proposed within Notified Industrial Area at Plot No. 4924, Notofied Industrial

area, GIDC Sarigam, Umbergaon, Valsad (Gujarat).

Total investment for the proposed project will be Rs. 600 Lakhs.

1.3.2 Importance to the Country and the Region

The proposed project provides a potential growth opportunity for the already running

business of the company. The company is already engaged in the business of Pesticides

The project would increase the overall export and also increase the foreign revenue. Product

is now well established and acceptable in the international markets. Additional capacities of

product range required over and above our capacities, as the company expect strong growth

of exports to the extent of 40-50%. Local market also shows strong growth potential. This

project will generate employment of up to 15 people.

1.4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

1.4.1 Scope and methodology of the study

Compliance of ToR points as per the ToR letter issued on 22nd July, 2018 by Ministry of

Environment, forest and climent change New Delhi. This compliance includes:

Collection of baseline data with respect to Air, Noise, Water, Land, Biological and Socio-

economic components for one season.

Identification and assessment of impacts on environment and suggesting mitigation

measures.

Preparation of Environmental Monitoring, Management and RA/DMP Plan.



1.4.2 Statutory Clearance as Other Permissions

The list of identified legislations applicable to the project is given in Table 1-2.

Table 1-2: Identified Applicable Statutory

Sr. No. Legal Instruments

1 The Factories Act, 1948

2 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Rules, 1975, as amended to

date.

3 The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and Rules, 1982, as amended to

date.

4 The Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical rules, 1989, as amended to

date.

5 The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and Rules, 1986, as amended to date

6 Chemical accidents (Emergency Planning, preparedness and response) Rules, 1996

7 The Motor Vehicles Act, 1988 & The Central Motor Vehicle rules, 1989

8 Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Trans boundary Movement) Rules, 2016

as amended to date

9 Construction and Demolition Waste Management Rules, 2016

10 The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 as amended to date

11 Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006 as amended to date

12 Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 and Rules, 1991 as amended to date

13 The Poisons Act, 1919 as amended to date

14 The Insecticide Act, 1968 and Rules, 1971



1.4.3 Approved ToR for EIA study by EAC

The MoEF, New Delhi has finalized the Terms of References (TORs) for carrying out

Environmental studies.

Compliance of ToR

Summarized details of the compliance status of this report with the prescribed ToR are

provided in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3: Compliance with the Terms of Reference

S. No. ToR Points Reply Citation in EIA Report

A STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE

1 Executive Summary Summary and Conclusion

attached in Initial pages of EIA.

2 Introduction

i Details of the EIA Consultant

including NABET accreditation

Eco Chem Sales & Services is a NABET accredited

consultant, having NABET Certificate No.

NABET/EIA/1720/RA 051 valid up to Feb. 03, 2020.

Section 12.1, Ch. 12, Pg. 200 and NABETcertificated attached as Initil pages of

EIA report.

ii Information about the project

proponent

M/s. Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd., established in

2018, is managed by the promoters and whole time

Managing Director Mr. Bhargav Desai

Detailed information is given in Section 1.2.2, Ch.

1, Pg.1

iii

Importance and benefits of the project

Importance and project benefits are given in Ch. 1

Detailed information provided in section 1.3,

Ch. 1, Pg. 2

3 Project Description

i Cost of project and time of

completion.

Total project cost will be ~6 Cr and time of completion will be ~6- 8 months after

getting EC

Sub-Section 2.4.2, Pg. 22 and Section 2.6 Pg. 24,

Ch.2,

ii Products with capacities for

the proposed project.

The production capacity of proposed project is 500

TPM

Details of proposed products along with their production capacities are provided in Section 2.4, Table 2-3, Ch.2, Pg. 22

iii

If expansion project, details of existing products with

capacities and whether adequate land is available for

expansion, reference of earlier EC if any.

Not applicable ---

iv List of raw materials required and their source along with

mode of transportation.

List of raw material is provided in chapter 2.

Details of Raw material quantity, source and mode of transportation is provided

inTable 2-14, Section

2.7.2, Ch. 2, Pg. 29.

v

Other chemicals and materials required with

Storage facilities of other chemicals are given in

Details of storage facilities is provided in




quantities and storage capacities

chapter 2. Table 2-15 Ch. 2, Pg. 31

vi Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation

and their management.

Emission

Flue Gas stack: PM, SO2 and NOx

Management: Adequate stack height of

chimney.

Process Stack: P2O5

Management: Two stage water scrubber

Effluent

Waste water genartion: 2.8 KLD

Manamgement: ETP

Hazardous Waste

ETP Waste will be disposed to TSDF site, Used Oil Will be sold to Registered re-processersand Discarded containers Will be sold to

authorized recycler Phosphoric acid(60%) will

be sell to rule 9.

Details provided in Section 2.7.4 Pg. 34, Section 2.7.9 Pg. 37, Section 2.7.10, Pg.

40 Ch 2.

vii

Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water balance

diagram, man-power requirement (regular and

contract)

Total fresh requirement of water is 6.5 KLD which will

be sourced from GIDC.

Manpower required are 75 and power requirement will

125 KVA,

Break up of water consumption, water

balance, approval letter is provided in chapter 2.

Details provided in Section 2.5.2, Pg. 23,section 2.5.3 Pg. 23 and Section 2.5.4

Pg. 24, Ch. 2.

Copy of Water supply letter is attached as Annexure 4,

Pg.214

viii

Process description along with major equipment‟s and machineries, process flow

sheet (quantitative) from raw material to products to be

provided

Detailed process description along with major equipment‟s and

machineries, process flow sheet are provided in

chapter 2.

Details provided in

Section 2.7, Ch. 2 Pg. 25

ix Hazard identification and details of proposed safety

systems.

Details on Hazard identification and proposed safety systems are provided

in chapter 7.

Details provided in Section 7.3, Table 7-5, pg. 155

x

Expansion/modernization proposals:

a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s)

including Amendments thereto obtained for the

project from MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached as an

Annexure. A certified copy of the latest as per circular

dated 30th May, 2012 on the

status of compliance of

Not Applicable ---




conditions stipulated Monitoring Report of the Regional Office of the

Ministry of Environment and Forests in all the existing environmental clearances

including Amendments shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance of

Consent to Operate for the ongoing /existing operation of the project from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA-

EMP report.

b. In case the existing project has not obtained

environmental clearance, reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of the

EIA Notification 1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided. Copies of Consent

to Establish/No Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in case of units

operating prior to EIA Notification 2006, CTE and

CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB shall

be submitted. Further, compliance report to the

conditions of consents from the SPCB shall be submitted.

Not Applicable ---

4 Site Details

i

Location of the project site covering village,

Taluka/Tehsil, District and State, Justification for

selecting the site, whether other sites were considered.

Location map of site covering village,

Taluka/Tehsil, District, and State is given in Chapter 3.

Details provided in Section 2.3 Map 2-1, pg.17, chp. 2

ii

A Toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km and

site location on 1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on

an A3/A2 sheet. (including all eco-sensitive areas and

environmentally sensitive places)

Study area of radius 10 Km and site location falls under Toposheet of F43S15 & 16 Map attached in Chapter 3.

Toposheet Map attached as Map 3-1, pg.47

iii

Details w.r.t. option analysis for selection of site

No alternate site analysis is done.

Details provided in ch. 5, pg. 137

iv

Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site.

Co-ordinates of project sites are given in Ch. 2

Provided in Map 2-2 Ch. 2, Pg. 18

v

Google map-Earth downloaded of the project

site.

Google Earth image with project boundary is shown in

Ch. 2.

Provided in Map 2-3 Ch. 2, Pg. 20

vi Layout maps indicating Layout Map of site provided Map shown as Map 2-3 Ch.




existing unit as well as proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area,

greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an Industrial

area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial Area indicating location of unit within the

Industrial area/Estate.

in EIA report 2, Pg. 20

vii

Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) plant site. If existing, show

photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in

particular.

Photographs of plant and greenbelt are shown in in

EIA report

Plant photographs are provided in Photograph 2-1, Section 2.3, Ch. 2,

Pg. 21

viii

Landuse break-up of total land of the project site

(identified and acquired), government/ private -

agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies, settlements, etc. shall be included. (not required for

industrial area)

The proposed project is located within notified

Industrial Area of GIDC Sarigam.

--

ix

A list of major industries with name and type within study area (10km radius) shall be

incorporated. Land use details of the study area

List of Major industries is given in Ch. 2. Land use

details of the study area are given in Ch. 3.

List of Major Industries is provided in Section 2.3.3 Ch. 2, Pg19& Land use details are provided in

Section 3.6, Pg.63

x

Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the

study area shall be included.

Geological and Geo-hydrological status is given

in Ch. 3.

Details are provided in

Section 3.7, Pg.66

xi

Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius of

study area. If the site is within 1 km radius of any major

river, peak and lean season river discharge as well as

flood occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of

Flood Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level of

the river shall also be provided. (mega green field

projects)

Site does not fall within 1 Km radius of any major

river.

Drainage Map is attached as Map 3-1, pg. 47

xii

Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete,

stage of the acquisition process and expected time of complete possession of the

land.

land is possession of project proponent

--

xiii

R&R details in respect of land in line with state Government

policy

NA NA

5 Forest and wildlife related




issues

(if applicable):

i

Permission and approval for the use of forest land

(forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations of the State Forest Department. (if

applicable)

No forest Land is involved. NA

ii

Land use map based on High resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed site

delineating the forestland (in case of projects involving

forest land more than 40 ha)

NA NA

iii

Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I forestry clearance

along with latest status shall be submitted.

NA NA

iv

The projects to be located within 10 km of the National

Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves,

Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project

proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by

Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features vis-à-

vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of the Chief

Wildlife Warden-thereon.

NA NA

v

Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the

Chief Wildlife Warden of the State Government for

conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in the

study area.

NA NA

vi

Copy of application submitted for clearance under the Wildlife (Protection) Act,

1972, to the Standing Committee of the National

Board for Wildlife.

NA NA

6 Environmental Status

i

Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project

site and site-specific micrometeorological data

using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed

and direction and rainfall.

Project site and site specific micrometeorological data

are given in Ch. 3.

Provided in Section 3.3, Ch.3, Pg. 51

ii

AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10, PM2.5,

AAQ data along with locations and results in

Provided in Section 3.4, Ch.3, Pg. 56




SO2, NOX, CO and other parameters relevant to the

project shall be collected. The monitoring stations shall be based CPCB guidelines and

take into account the pre-dominant wind direction,

population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved

forests.

provided in Ch. 3

iii

Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all stations as per frequency

given in the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with - min., max.,

average and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters from data of all AAQ stations

should be provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.

Raw data of all AAQ measurement is provided in

EIA report

Attached as Annexure 9, Pg. 297

iv

Surface water quality of nearby River (100m upstream and downstream of discharge

point) and other surface drains at eight locations as

per CPCB/MoEF & CC guidelines.

The proposed project does not involve discharge of

water in any surface water body

Details provided in section 3.11 Sub-Section 3.11.7,

pg.76, Ch.3,

v

Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river

identified by the CPCB/MoEF & CC, if yes give details.

The site does not fall near to polluted stretch of river identified by the CPCB/

MoEFCC

NA

vi Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall

be included

Ground Water monitoring was carried out and details

of the same along with analysis results are given in

Ch. 3.

Details provided in section 3.11 Sub- Section Ch.3,

Pg. 71.

vii

Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study

area.

Noise Monitoring was carried and details are given

in Ch. 3.

Details provided in Section 3.5, Ch.3, Pg 60

viii

Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines.

Soil sampling was done and details with analytical results

are given in Ch. 3.

Details provided in Section 3.10, Ch.3, Pg. 68

ix

Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency of

vehicles for transportation of materials, additional traffic due to proposed project, parking arrangement etc.

Traffic Study of the area is given in Ch. 3.

Details provided in Section 3.9, Ch.3, Pg. 67

x

Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and

aquatic) existing in the study area shall be given with

special reference to rare,

Detailed description of Flora and Fauna is provided in

Ch. 3.

Details provided in Section 3.12 Ch.3, Pg. 82

Conservation Plan is provided in Section 10.2.1,

pg. 186




endemic and endangered species. If Schedule-I fauna are found within the study

area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan shall be prepared and

furnished.

xi

Socio-economic status of the study area.

Socio-economic status of the area is given in Ch. 3

Details provided in Section 3.13, Ch.3, , Pg. 88

7

Impact and Environment Management Plan

i

Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants

from the stack emission based on site-specific

meteorological features. In case the project is located on

a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modeling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain

characteristics for determining the potential

impacts of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of

all sources of emissions (including transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be

assessed. Details of the model used and the input

data used for modeling shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation

nearby, sensitive receptors, if any.

Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants with the help of AERMOD

software, mainly SO2, NOX, based on site specific meteorological data is

shown in Ch. 4.

Details provided in Section 4.1.2 Ch.4 Pg. 107

ii

Water Quality modeling - in case of discharge in water

body

No discharge of effluent in water body is envisaged

hence not applicable.

--

iii

Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end

products on the surrounding environment shall be

assessed and provided. In this regard, options for

transport of raw materials and finished products and wastes

(large quantities) by rail or rail-cum road transport or

conveyor-cum-rail transport shall be examined.

Detail impact of the transport of the raw

materials and end products on the surrounding

environment is assessed and is provided in Ch.4

Details provided in Section 4.1.1, Ch.4, Pg. 104

iv

A note on treatment of wastewater from different plant operations, extent recycled and reused for

different purposes shall be included. Complete scheme

The waste water generated from the process will be

treated in ETP

Domestic waste water will be treated in Septic tank. Complete scheme, and

Details provided in Sub-Section

2.7.9, Ch. 2, Pg. 37




of effluent treatment. Characteristics of untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of discharge under E(P) Rules.

characteristics of untreated effluent are provided in Ch.

2

v Details of stack emission and

action plan for control of emissions to meet standards.

Details of Stack emission and action plan for the same

is provided in Ch.2

Details provided in

Sub-Section 2.7.4, Ch. 2,

Pg. 34

vi

Measures for fugitive emission control

Details are given in Ch. 2. Sub-Section 2.7.6, Ch. 2 Pg.35

vii

Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization and management.

Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and

hazardous waste in cement plant shall also be included.

EMP shall include the concept of waste-

minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy

conservation, and natural resource conservation.

Details of Hazardous waste and management is provided in Ch. 2.

Details provided in

Sub-Section 2.7.10 Ch. 2

Pg. 40

Concept of waste-minimization,

recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy

conservation, and natural resource conservation is

provided in Section 10.2.2,

Ch.10, Pg. 188

viii

Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A

detailed plan of action shall be provided.

Not Applicable ---

ix

Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species,

width of plantation, planning schedule etc. shall be

included. The green belt shall be around the project

boundary and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the project shall also be

incorporated.

Green belt will be developed in 500 m

2 within the plant

premises. Local trees and shrubs have been planted in

greenbelt area. Detail is incorporated in EIA report.

Action plan provided in Sub-Section 10.2.1,

Ch.10, Pg. 186

x

Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant

site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water

drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the

various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water

requirement from other sources.

Detailed Rain Water Harvesting and Recharge scheme is given in Ch. 10.

Action plan provided in Section 10.2.3, Ch.10, Pg.

189

xi

Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for

Cost for EMS of propsed project Capital cost – Rs. 10

Detailed capital cost and recurring cost/annum for




environmental pollution control measures shall be

included.

Lakh and

Recurring cost of project – Rs. 5 Lakh/annum.

A detail is incorporated in EIA report.

environmental pollution control measures are

provided in Table 6-9 and Table 6-10.

Table 6-9Ch. 6, Pg. 149

xii

Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring

shall be submitted.

Detailed action plan for post-project monitoring is

given in Ch. 6.

Detailed action plan Ch. 6,

Pg. 139

xiii

Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made)

Preparedness and Emergency Management

Plan including Risk Assessment and damage

control. Disaster management plan should be linked with District Disaster

Management Plan.

Onsite and Offsite DMP and Risk Assessment is given in

Ch. 7.

Details provided in

Ch. 7 section 7.6, Pg.165

8 Occupational health

i

Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational

health & safety of all contract and casual workers

Rs. 2.0 Lacs has been allotted for occupational

health and safety for propsed project.

--

ii

Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of

worker. If the workers' health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x

rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near

vision, colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre-placement and

periodical examinations give the details of the same.

Details regarding last month analyzed data of above

mentioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of

exposure and department wise.

New Project hense in this not Applicable

---

iii

Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the

exposure levels of hazards and whether they are within Permissible Exposure level

(PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to

keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be

preserved,

New Project hense in this not Applicable

---

iv

Annual report of health status of workers with special

reference to Occupational

Details ar provided in chapter 10.

Details provided in

Section 10.3, pg. 190




Health and Safety.

9

Corporate Environment Policy

i

Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be

detailed in the EIA report.

Environment Policy is attached in Annexure.

Environment Policy is attached Annexure 7,

pg.219

ii

Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard

operating process / procedures to bring into focus any infringement / deviation / violation of the environmental or forest norms / conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the

EIA.

Environment Policy is attached in Annexure.

Environment Policy is attached Annexure 7,

pg.219

iii

What is the hierarchical system or Administrative

order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance

with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.

The hierarchical system or administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and

for ensuring compliance with the EC conditions is provided in Ch.10.

Details provided in

Section 10.4 Ch.10, Pg. 190

iv

Does the company have system of reporting of non-compliances / violations of environmental norms to the

Board of Directors of the company and / or

shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting

mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report

The reporting mechanism is provided in Ch.10

Details provided in

Section 10.4 Ch.10, Pg.

190

10

Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom

etc. to be provided to the labour force during

construction as well as to the casual workers including

truck drivers during operation phase.

Details are given in chapter 2 of EIA report.

Details provided in 2.5, Ch 2. , Pg. 22

11

Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

i

Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of the project cost) shall be

earmarked towards the Enterprise Social

Commitment based on Public Hearing issues and item-wise details along with time bound action plan shall be included. Socio-economic development

activities need to be

Rs. 12 lakh is earmarked towards the Enterprise

Social Commitment and the same is incorporated in EIA

report.

Details provided in section 6.2 , Ch. 6, Pg. 147




elaborated upon.

ii

Any litigation pending against the project and/or any

direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the

project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unit received any notice

under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of

Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and

compliance/ATR to the notice(s) and present status

of the case.

No litigation is pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed

by any Court of Law against the project

--

iii A tabular chart with index for

point wise compliance of above TOR.

Complied Index for point wise compliance of above TOR

is prescribed in initial pages of EIA report.

B Specific ToR Points

i

Commitment that no banned pesticides will be

manufactured

Commitment that no banned pesticides is attached in

Annexures.

Details provided in Annexure 6, pg.218

ii

Details on solvents to be used,measuresfor solvent recovery and for emissions

control

No solvent will be used Not Applicable

iii Details of process emissions from the proposed unit and its

arrangement to control

Details of process emissions from the proposed unit and its arrangement to control

given in chapter 2.

Details provided in Section 2.7.5, Ch.2, pg.34

iv

Ambient air quality data should include VOC, other process- specific ollutants*

like NH3*,

chlorine*, HCl*, HBr*, H2S*, HF*, CS2 etc., (*-as

applicable)

Details are provided in Chapter 3.

Details provided in Section 3.4, Ch.3, pg.56

v Work zone monitoring

arrangements for hazardous chemicals

Work zone monitoring arrangements for hazardous chemicals is provided in ch.

10.

Details provided in Section 7.2, Ch.7, pg.151

vi

Detailed effluent treatment scheme including

ssegregation for units adopting 'Zero' liquid

discharge

Detailed effluent treatment scheme including

ssegregation for units adopting 'Zero' liquid

discharge is provided in ch. 2.

Details provided in

Sub-Section 2.7.9, Ch. 2, Pg. 37

vii Action plan for odour control

to be submitted

Odour control plan given in ch.2

Details provided in

Sub-Section 2.7.7, Pg. 36, Ch. 2,

viii

A copy of the Memorandum of Understanding signed with

cement manufacturers

Unit shall not generating any

organic solid/hazardous

Not Applicable




indicating clearly

that they co-process organic solid/hazardous waste

generated

waste which is used in co-

process of cement

manufacturer.

ix

Authorization/Membership for the disposal of liquid effluent in CETP and solid/hazardous

waste in

TSDF, if any

For TSDF membership will be obtained after getting

EC. There is no any discharge in CETP.

--

x

Material Safety Data Sheet for all the Chemicals are being used/will be used

MSDS of all the chemicals is attached as separate

document

Details provided in

Annexure 8, pg.220

xi

Authorization/Membership for the disposal of

solid/hazardous waste in TSDF

For TSDF membership will be obtained after getting

EC. There is no any discharge in CETP.

--

xii

Details of incinerator if to be installed

No incinerator if to be installed

Not Applicable

xiii

Risk assessment for storage and handling of hazardous chemicals/solvents. Action

plan for handling

& safety system to be incorporated

Risk assessment for storage and handling of hazardous chemicals/solvents is given

in ch. 7.

Details are provided in Table 7-5, pg. 155, ch. 7

xv

Arrangements for ensuring health and safety of workers engaged in handling of toxic

materials

Details for ensuring health and safety of workers

engaged in handling of toxic materials in ch. 7.

Details are provided in Section 7.4 pg.153, ch. 7

1.5 STRUCTURE OF THE EIA REPORT

The EIA Report has been prepared on the basis of EIA Notification, with special reference to

the TOR conditions received from MoEF&CC, vide letter No. IA – J – 11011/201/2018-IA II

(I) Dated: 22/07/2018 for proposed project for manufacture of pesticides. Copy of the said

TOR letter is enclosed as Annexure-I. The baseline data was collected in Post-Monsoon

season during October 2018 to December 2018.



2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

This chapter provides a condensed description of those aspects of the project likely to cause

environmental effects. Details are described in following sections with regards to type, need,

location, size or magnitude of project operations, technology and other related activities.

2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT

M/s Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. proposes to set up a plant for the manufacturing of

“Pesticides” which are used for stored grain insects and pests. The product will be used for

domestic and quarantine fumigation only.

As per the EIA notification- 2006 as amended thereof, products covered under category 5(b)

„A‟ requires prior Environmental Clearance

Details on schedule and category as per notification are shown in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1: Schedule and category as per EIA notification

Project or Activity Category

5 (b) Pesticides industry and pesticide specific intermediates

(excluding formulations) A

2.2 NEED FOR THE PROJECT

The proposed project provides a potential growth opportunity for the already running

business of the company. The company is already engaged in the business of Pesticides.

The project would increase the overall export and also increase the foreign revenue. Product

is now well established and acceptable in the international markets. Additional capacities of

product range required over and above our capacities, as the company expect strong growth

of exports to the extent of 40-50%. Local market also shows strong growth potential. This

project will generate employment of up to 25 people.

2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

2.3.1 General Location of the Site

The proposed project will be located in Notified Industrial area. The area is already having

number of pesticide industries. The industrial estate was notified in 1997. There are more

than 500 existing units within the notified estate.

The letter of plot allotment and Sarigam GIDC Notification are enclosed as Annexure 2 and

Annexure 3 respectively.

The general location of the site is shown in Map 2-1, project site marked on Google Earth along with coordinates of the site is shown in Map 2-2.



Map 2-1: Map Showing Location of Project Site

INDIA GUJARAT STATE

PROJECT SITE VALSAD DISTRICT

EIA-EMP Report for Proposed Project for the Manufacture of Pesticides (Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide Technical) at Sarigam Notified Industrial area, GIDC Sarigam, Valsad


Map 2-2: Project site marked on Google Earth

M/s. Integrated Chemisol

Pvt. Ltd.

Proposed Project for the Manufacture of

Pesticides (Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc

Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide

Technical)

Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC

Sarigam, District - Valsad, Gujarat

Coordinates of Site

S.No Latitude Longitude

A 20°17'12.31"N 72°50'46.79"E

B 20°17'11.58"N 72°50'45.68"E

C 20°17'12.84"N 72°50'44.64"E

D 20°17'13.86"N 72°50'46.24"E



2.3.2 Approach to the Project Site

By Road

The site is well connected with NH-8 (Surat-Mumbai) located at 4.65 Km towards SE.

The site is approachable through SH-5 located at 3.86 Km, towards SE.

By Air

Nearest is Daman Airport located at 16.2 KM towards N.

By Rail

Bhilad Railway Station is at 4.66 Km in E direction.

2.3.3 Site Details

Project site specific details are provided in Table 2-2 and study area map of 10 km radius of

the site is shown in Map 2-3.

Table 2-2: Location Details and Project Site Specific Environmental Sensitivity Details

Basic Location Details

Particular Details

Plot No./Survey No./Khasra No. of the Project Location*: Plot No. 4924

Address and Pincode GIDC Sarigam, 396155

District Valsad

State Gujarat

Bounded Longitudes(East) 72.84398° to 72.8448°

Bounded Latitudes (North) 20.28549° to 20.28598°

No. of SoI (Survey of India) Topo Sheet No. F43S15&

F43S16

Maximum Elevation Above Mean Sea Level(AMSL) 28 m

Seismic Zone 3

Environment Sensitivity

Environmental Sensitivity Name Distance & Direction

Nearest habiation Sarigam 2.2 km in E direction

Water Body (Buffer Zone) Takor Nadi

Kalu Nadi

1.3 km in S direction

4.92 km in E direction

WLS/ESA/ESZ Dadra & Nagar Haveli WLS 13.3 km in SW direction

Archeological Site Moti Mahal Fortwalls 13.5 km in N direction



Map 2-3: Study Area Map

M/s. Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd.

Proposed Project for the Manufacture of Pesticides

(Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc Phosphide,

Magnesium Phosphide Technical)

Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC

Sarigam, District - Valsad, Gujarat

Study Area Map

Legend

Industrial/Habitation Area

Mining Area

Water Bodies

Railway Line

Roads



Photographs showing the unit and plant area is provided in Photograph 2-1

Photograph 2-1: Photographs of Project site

Entry Gate

Project Site- Ambient Air Monitoring

2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION

2.4.1 Production Capacity and transportation details

The proposed project will be a small scale unit and details of proposed products, their

production capacity and their mode of transport is provided below in Table 2-3.



Table 2-3: Proposed Production Capacity

S. No.


transportaion



2.4.2 Cost of the Project

Estimated project cost is 600 lakh. Detailed breakup of project cost, both capital and

recurring, is provided below in Table 2-4.

Table 2-4: Capital Cost Projection

S. No. Particulars Cost in Rs. (Lakh)

1. Land 200

2. Building 100

3. Plant and Machinery 280

4. Utility 10

5. Environmental Management System 10

Total Project Cost 600

2.5 ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES REQUIRES BY OR FOR THE

PROJECT

2.5.1 Utilities

Steam Boiler and Cooling tower will be required as major utility for the proposed project

along with other machinery and equipments. The details required are provided below in

Table 2-5 and Table 2-6 respectively.

33%

17% 46%

2% 2%

Capital Cost Projection

Land Building Plant and Machinery Utility Environmental Management System



Table 2-5: Utility List

S. No. Particulars Capacity

1 Steam Boiler, TPH 0.2

2 Cooling Tower, TR 300

Table 2-6: Equipment and Machinery List

S. No. Equipment / Utility Name

1 Firing Chamber with Scrubbing System

2 Reaction Pot

3 Mixing unit for Technical Use.

4 ALP Broker Unit

5 M.S Mixing tank ,jacketed

6 Master Tank

7 Outer side Hot Water Tank

8 Wax Mixing tank with Steam jacketed

9 S.S Water tank for Pos. transfer in Reaction Plot

10 Blower

11 Fresh Air Blower

12 Steam Boiler

13 Cooling Tower

14 Hydraulic Trolley 2 Ton Capacity

15 Lift 2 Ton Capacity.

2.5.2 Power

Steam required will be obtained from proposed steam boiler. As the proposed project will be

in GIDC, the electricity will be sourced from Dakshin Gujarat Vij Company Limited. Natural

gas will be used as fuel in boilers and it will be sourced from GSPC Limited. Details of power

and fuel requirements are provided in Table 2-7.

Table 2-7: Power and Fuel Requirement

S. No. Particulars Capacity Source

Steam requirements

1 Steam requirement 200 kg/h Will be obtained from proposed

steam boiler of 0.2 TPH capacity

Power requirements

2 Electricity requirement 125 kVA Dakshin Gujarat Vij Co. Ltd.

3 D.G. Set (Standby), KVA 100

Fuel requirement

4 Natural gas for steam boiler (0.2 TPH) 15 SCM/h GSPC Limited

5 Fuel (HSD) for 100 KVA D. G. Set 15 kg/h Local Dealer

2.5.3 Water

Total water consumption will be 9.3 KLD, out of which 6.5 KLD will be fresh water and 2.8

KLD will be recycled water. Fresh water will be sourced from Sarigam GIDC. Letter of water



permission is enclosed as Annexure 4. Details of water requirements is provided below in

Table 2-8.

Table 2-8: Water requirement details

Particular Details

Source GIDC

Mode of Transportation Pipeline

Letter No. GIDC/DEE/SRC/91

Permitted Quantity (Kilolitre per Day (KLD)) 10

Required Quantity (Kilolitre per Day (KLD)) 6.5

Distance of Source of Water from Project Location (Kilometers) * 2 km

Date of Issue 23/05/2018

2.5.4 Manpower

As it will be a small scale unit, employement of upto 15 people will be generated during

operational phase. But along with that indirect employment will be generated during

construction and operational phase, details of which are provided in Table 2-9.

Table 2-9: Manpower Details

Particular Number of employees

Permanent Employment-During Construction 30

Temporary Employment-During Construction 20

Permanent Employment-During Operation 15

Temporary Employment-During Operation 10

No. of working days 300

2.6 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND

IMPLEMENTATION

Detailed list of activities and approvals require after receipt of EC and tentative time frame

required is given in Table 2-10.

Project will be commissioned within 6 to 8 months after receipt of EC.

Table 2-10: Proposed Schedule for Approval and Implementation

ACTIVITY / MONTH, YEAR APR-19 MAY-19 JUNE-19 July-19 Aug-19 Sept-19

Receipt of EC



ACTIVITY / MONTH, YEAR APR-19 MAY-19 JUNE-19 July-19 Aug-19 Sept-19

Tender floating

Construction

Erection & completion

CTO/CCA

Commissioning of Plant

2.7 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION

2.7.1 Manufacturing Technology

The company will use the latest available process technology for the production. This

chapter includes the manufacturing process of the product, chemical reactions, and material

mass balance for the product.

1. Aluminium Phosphide

Chemical Reaction for Aluminum Phosphide (79-82%)

Process: Aluminium powder along with saw dust and graphite powder fed into the reaction pot. The lid is placed on the pot andis take for mixing. Yellow Phosphorous is then added gradually into reaction pot, keeping the inert gas blanketing and stirring.After the proper mixing is done, reaction pot is taken to the reaction chamber, where the reaction is carried out by removinginert blanketing. The Phosphorus is converting into P2O5 producing Heat up to 600oC to start Aluminium Phosphide reaction.The P2O5 generated during the reaction is scrubbed with water to form Phosphoric Acid. The Phosphoric Acid thus generated isre - circulated at scrubber to get higher concentration of Phosphoric Acid (H3PO4). The tail gas scrubber is provided to scrubresidual gas before discharging to atmosphere with high level stack. After natural cooling, reacted mass is wax coated in the rodmil and then formulated in the ribbon blender to give Aluminum Phosphide in powder form for the packing.

4 Al + P4 4 AlP

Aluminum Phosphorus Aluminum Phosphide107.92 123.9 231.8

Chemical reaction:

Chemical reaction to form Phosphoric acid:

4 P + 5 O2 2 P2O5

P2O5 + 3 H2O 2H3PO4



Figure 2-1: Aluminium Phosphide Flow Diagram

Aluminium powder along with saw dust and graphite powder is fed in the reaction pot. The

lid is placed on the pot and is taken for mixing. Yellow Phosphorus is then added gradually

into reaction pot, keeping the inert gas blanketing and stirring. After the proper mixing is

done, reaction pot is taken to the reaction chamber, where the reaction is carried out by

removing inert blanketing. The Phosphorus is converted into P2O5 producing heat up to

600°C which is used to start Aluminium Phosphide reaction. The P2O5 generated during the

reaction is scrubbed with water to form Phosphoric Acid. The Phosphoric Acid thus

generated is re-circulated at scrubber to get higher concentration of Phosphoric Acid

[H3PO4]. The tail gas scrubber is provided to scrub residual gas before discharging to

atmosphere through stack. After natural cooling, reacted mass is wax coated in the rod mil

and then formulated in the ribbon blender to convert Aluminium Phosphide in powder form

for the packing.

Table 2-11: Mass Balance of Aluminium Phosphide

Input Quantity(kg) Output Quantity(kg)

Yellow Phosphorus 480 Phosphoric Acid 240

Aluminium Powder 530 Aluminium Phosphide 1000

Graphite Powder 15 - -

Saw Dust 30 - -

Wax 45 - -

Water 140 - -

Total 1240 - 1240



2. Zinc Phosphide

Figure 2-2: Zinc Phosphide Flow Diagram

Zinc dust/Zinc dross is taken into the reactor. Phosphorous is added gradually at control

condition. The reaction between Zinc Dust & Phosphorous takes place in the reaction vessel

to form Zinc Phosphide which is an exothermic reaction. After natural cooling, reacted mass

is wax coated in the rod mil and then formulated in the ribbon blender to convert Zinc

Phosphide in powder form for the packing.The reacted Phosphorous is converted into P2O5

which is scrubbed in absorption tower to form Phosphoric Acid as a byproduct.

Table 2-12: Mass Blanace of Zinc Phosphide

Input Quantity (kg) Output Quantity (kg)

Yellow Phosphorous 265 Phospheric Acid 150

Zinc powder 785 Zinc Phosphide 1000

Water 100 - -

Total 1150 - 1150

Chemical Reaction for Zinc Phosphide (92-95%)

Process: Zinc Dust/Zinc Dross is taken into the reactor. Phosphorous is added gradually at control condition. The reaction betweenZinc Dust & Phosphorous takes place in the reaction Vessel to form Zinc Phosphide which is an exothermic reaction. The reactedPhosphorus is converted into P2O5 which is scrubbed in absorption tower to form phosphoric acid as a byproduct.

6 P (liquid) + 3 Zn (Metal) + 5 O2 Zn3P2 + 2 P2O5

Phosphorus Zinc Zinc Phosphide Phosphorous Pentoxide185.82 196.14 160 258.08 283.88

Chemical reaction:


P2O5 + 3 H2O 2H3PO4



3. Magnesium Phosphide

Figure 2-3: Magnesium Phosphide Flow Diagram

Magnesium powder is mixed with Red Phosphorus is presence of groundnut oil to give

Technical Magnesium Phosphide (86%). P2O5 generated during the reaction is scrubbed

with water to give H3PO4 acid as a byproduct. Technical Magnesium Phosphide is then

dilute with ingredients like Paraffin Wax, MR 17, T.G.Urea, Zinc Stearate and Graphite to

give required Magnesium Phosphide with 66%.This magnesium Phosphide is then sent for

either tableting or directly for pouch packing.

Table 2-13: Mass Blanace of Magnesium Phosphide

Input Quantity (kg) Output Quantity (kg)

Red Phosphorus 513 Phospheric Acid 224

Magnesium 538 Magnesium Phosphide 1000

Ground nut Oil 12.8 - -

MgO 10.2 - -

Water 150 - -

Total 1224 - 1224

Chemical Reaction for Magnesium Phosphide (86%)

Process: Magnesium powder is mixed with Red Phosphorus in presence of groundnut oil to give Technical MagnesiumPhosphide (86%). P2O5 generated during the reaction is scrubbed with water to give H3PO4 acid as a byproduct.

Technical Magnesium Phosphide is then dilute with ingredients like Paraffin Wax, MR 17, T.G. Urea, Zinc Stearate and Graphiteto give required Magnesium Phosphide with 66%.

This Magnesium Phosphide is then sent for either tabletting or directly for Pouch Packing.

6 Mg + 8 P + 5 O2 2 Mg3P2 + 2P2O5

Magnesium Phosphorus 160 Magnesium Phosphide Phosphorus pentoxide 144 247.76 268 283.88

Chemical reaction:


2P2O5 + 6 H2O 4H3PO4


Eco Chem Sales & Services, Surat Doc. No: 2017_ECSS_EIAI2_1700034 Chapter 2

29

2.7.2 Raw Material details

Details of productwise raw material requirement along with mode of transportation and sourcing details are provided below in Table 2-14.

Table 2-14: Raw material for Technical grade

S. No.

Raw Materials CAS No Quantity

(TPM) Unit Source

Mode of Transport*

Distance of Source from Project Site (Kms)

Type of Linkage*

Per ton of product (MT)

Aluminium Phosphide - Technical (79-82%)

1 Yellow Phosphorus 7723-14-0

240 TPM local Truck 50 -500 m -- 0.48

2 Aluminium powder 7429-90-5

265 TPM local Truck

50 -500 m -- 0.53

3 Graphite Powder 7782-42-5

7.5 TPM local Truck

50 -500 m -- 0.015

4 Saw Dust --

15 TPM local Truck

50 -500 m -- 0.03

5 Paraffin Wax 8002-74-2

22.5 TPM local Truck

50 -500 m -- 0.045

6 Water for Scrubber 7732-18-5

70 TPM local Truck

50 -500 m -- 0.14

Total

620 TPM 1.24

Zinc Phosphide – Technical (92-95%)

1 Yellow Phosphorous 7723-14-0


50 -500 m -- 0.265

2 Zinc Powder 7440-66-6


50 -500 m -- 0.785



30

S. No.

Raw Materials CAS No Quantity

(TPM) Unit Source

Mode of Transport*

Distance of Source from Project Site (Kms)

Type of Linkage*

Per ton of product (MT)

3 Water for scrubber 7732-18-5

50 TPM local Truck 50 -500 m -- 0.1

Total

575 TPM 1.15

Magnesium Phosphide – Technical (86%)

1 Red Phosphorus 7723-14-0


50 -500 m -- 0.513

2 Magnesium 7439-95-4

269 TPM local Truck

50 -500 m -- 0.538

3 Ground nut oil --

6.4 TPM local Truck

50 -500 m -- 0.0128

4 Magnesium oxide 1309-48-4

5.1 TPM local Truck

50 -500 m -- 0.0102

Total

537 TPM 1.074

The technica; grade products Aluminium Phosphide - Technical (79-82%), Zinc Phosphide – Technical (92-95%) and Magnesium Phosphide –

Technical (86%) Will be used as raw material for inhouse formulation.

2.7.3 Storage Facilities

Storage details of hazardous substances within the proposed project are provided in Table 2-15.

.



31

Table 2-15: Storage Details

S.No. Name of hazardous

substance Max. storage

qty. Place of it’s

storage Operating Pressure

Operating

Temperature Type of hazard control measure provided

1 Phosphorus 50 MT

Store in covered area

(approx 25 MT in 200 kg MS

Barrel)

Atm. Around 30 Deg

C.

Dangerous goods of class 4:2 (Spontaneously combustible) hence it will be transported separately in closed container.

The Phosphorus drum will contain water above Phosphorus.

Drum transfer will be done by water pressure only. Tap water bath (Tank) will be provided for heating purposes during transfer of phosphorous from drum to reactor.

It will be stored in separate cool, well ventilated, out of direct sunlight area that will be away from oxidizing agents and source of heat or ignition. Shed will be provided.

Containers will be kept closed at all times.

Fire hydrant system will be provided in plant.

Yellow Phosphorous hazard and safety measures will be displayed in storage area.

Training will be provided to employees for safe handling of phosphorus.

First aid for phosphorus burn will be provided to employees.

2 Aluminium Powder 20 MT To keep in

separate Room 200 kg/m

2 Room temp.

Small particle of Aluminium powder spread-out during transportation, if it is not properly packed/covered. To control the same, material will be stored in close & separate room with proper ventilation. This room will be away from Electrical Wiring/Point. During transportation as well as discharging, adequate PPA will be provided.



32





Operating


3 Graphite Powder 5 MT In plastic bag with liner at

storage area. 200 kg/m

2 Room Temp.

Material will be kept in packed condition

4 Paraffin Wax 5 MT In plastic bag with liner at

storage area. 200 kg/m

2 Room Temp.

Material will be kept in packed condition

5 Zinc Powder 20 MT To keep in

separate Room 200 kg/m

2 Room temp.

Small particle of Aluminium Powder spread-out during Transportation if not properly packed/covered in open atmosphere while transferring to Control the same the material must be in close & separate room with proper ventilation. This room must be away from Electrical Wiring/Point. During transportation as well as discharging adequate PPA must be wear.

6 Red Phosphorous 100 MT

Store in covered area

(approx 25 MT in 200 kg MS

Barrel)

Atm. Around 30 Deg

C.

Material will be transported separately in closed container.

The Phosphorus drum will contain water above Phosphorus.

Drum transfer will be done by water pressure only. Tap water bath (Tank) will be provided for heating purposes during transfer of phosphorous from drum to reactor.

It will be stored in separate cool, well ventilated, out of direct sunlight area that will be away from oxidizing agents and source of heat or ignition. Shed will be provided.

Containers will be kept closed at all times.

Fire hydrant system will be provided in plant.

Yellow Phosphorous hazard and safety measures will be displayed in storage area.

Training will be provided to employees for safe handling of phosphorus.



33





Operating


First aid for phosphorus burn will be provided to employees.

7 Magnesium Oxide 2 MT In plastic bag with liner at

storage area.

Normal at STP

Normal at STP PPE‟s will be provided while handling the material

8 Magnesium Phosphide 100 MT

20 kg corrugated boxes at

storage area.

400 kg/m2 Room Temp.

Material will be packed in air tight Aluminium container and will be kept in proper ventilated closed godown.



2.7.4 Details of Air Pollution and APCM

Flue gas emission:

The company proposes to install 0.2 TPH capacity of steam boiler for the

requirement of process steam. The unit shall use 15 SCM/hr of natural gas as a fuel.

Also the unit proposes to install 100 KVA capacity of D G set as a stand by in case of

power failure. 15 kg/hr of HSD will be used as a fuel in D G set. 11 meters height of

chimney will be provided to steam boiler and D G set.

Process gas emission:

There will be emission from the manufacturing of technical product in the form of

Phosphorous pentoxide, which will be scrubbed in two stage water scrubber to get

phosphoric acid of 60% concentration, a valuable by-product. 11 meters height of

vent with SMF will be provided.

Table 2-16: Flue Gas Emissions

Source Capacity Fuel Fuel

Consumption Stack

Height(m) Stack

Diameter(m) Pollutants

Steam boiler

0.2 TPH Natural

Gas 15 SCM/h 11 m 300 mm NOx, SO2

D.G.Set 100 KVA HSD 15 L/h 11m 150 mm PM,NOx,

SO2

Table 2-17: Process Gas Emissions

Sr. no Particulars Process Gas Emission

1. Pollutant P2O5

1.1 APC to be provided Two stage water scrubber

1.2 Scrubber attached to reactor

1.3 Height of vent 11 meters

2.7.5 Design Specifications of APCM:

1. Details of Process gas emission & its control measures:

Table 2-18: Specification of P2O5 Scrubbing System

S. No. Particulars Details

1 Type Packed Column 1 & 2 nos in series

2 Diameter 500 mm

3 Height 3 meters

4 Material of Construction SS

5 Type of packing SS

6 Height of packing 2 meters



S. No. Particulars Details

7 Water circulation tank 2 kl, SS x 2

8 Circulation pump 3 HP x 2

9 Blower CI , 15 HP

Figure 2-4: P2O5 Scrubbing system

2.7.6 Fugitive Emission & Control Measures

Fugitive emissions from storage & handling area for raw materials, finished products is

envisaged due to proposed project. Odor of raw materials & finished goods shall be limited

to plant area.

Raw materials such as Phosphorus, Aluminium Powder, Ammonium Carbamate, and

products such as Aluminium Phosphide / Zinc Phosphide / Magnesium Phosphide Technical

have an unpleasant odour.

All the joints, flanges, pumps, glands, seals, valves are/ will be maintained in good

conditions through timely predictive and preventive maintenance;

P1

Water Water

60% H3PO4

CH

CH CH

CH

Gas from reactor

Pump

S1

Vent

Blower



Concrete road will be developed within plant premises to avoid fugitive dust due to

vehicle movement.

Regular checking and maintenance of the same will be carried out to avoid any

leakages.

Manufacturing activity will be carried out in closed reactors/vessels.

All the raw materials will be stored in closed containers and sealed bags and will be

handled through closed system to avoid the handling losses.

All pumps handling hazardous chemicals shall be provided with mechanical seals to

prevent fugitive emission.

Manual Handling of various chemicals will be avoided and will be designed by

implementing latest automation technology.

2.7.7 Odour Control Measures

Odor shall be controlled by taking following steps:

All raw materials shall be charged into Reactors under gravity through closed pipes.

All vents of holding tanks and dosing vessels shall be connected to a Vent Scrubber

system comprising of a suction Blower, Two stage water Scrubber, before venting

through a tall stack.

Suction Hoods shall be placed near the Man-holes & Charging funnels of Reactors &

Filters so that chemical vapors and dust do not escape into the Plant & surroundings,

when the man-hole covers are opened for inspection or charging of RM.

Vent lines of Dosing vessels of red phosphorus, yellow phosphorus, Zink oxide,

magnesium oxide, etc. shall be connected to the vents to prevent contaminated air

release during material transfer.

All pumps handling hazardous chemicals shall be provided with mechanical seals to

prevent fugitive emission. Wherever possible magnetic coupled pumps will be used.

Any spillage from drums etc. will be absorbed with saw dust / soda ash and moped

clean. The contaminated absorbent will be safely disposed off along with hazardous

waste.

Measuring Instruments with sound alarm and having strategically placed sensing

elements will be provided for alerting the personnel in case of any escape of gases like

phosphine.

All liquid raw materials will be charged into reactors with pumps or under gravity

through closed pipes

Vents of storage tanks are/ will be provided with a water filled trap to prevent escape

of acid fumes.

Boundary wall as Wind breaker is provided to restrict the dispersion of odor & dust

from the site.

Personal protective equipment like dust mast will be provided.

2.7.8 Noise pollution

Sources of Noise at Site

Noise from Machinery/ Equipment during construction phase



In addition to the plant activity, during construction phase, site preparation / closure related

activities will also involve the operation of heavy equipment like pile drivers, loaders, etc. The

equipment‟s will be used during daytime and will emit noise within permissible limits. Thus,

there will not be any adverse impact on nearby habitation due to proposed activity.

Noise from Operation of Plant

The pumps and associated machinery, including the DG set is likely to emit noise in the

range of 80 to 90 dbA. The high noise levels within the workshop, during maintenance and

shutdown also have the potential to affect the workers on site. Continuous exposure to high

noise level in workplace environment may cause Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) and

other discomforts like headaches and increase in stress levels in workers.

The sources considered at the project site are given in Table 2-19.

Table 2-19: Sources of Noise with their Sound Pressure Levels

S.

No. Sources

Levels dB(A)

Day Night

1 DG sets 100 100

2 Compressor 85 85

3 Pumps 85 85

4 FD-ID Fan 85 85

Noise from Vehicle / Traffic

Vehicle movement for transportation of materials and work force to the site will cause minor

noise emission as the frequency of vehicular movement will be few times in a week.

Noise from DG sets, Pumps

Noise generated from DG set, Pumps, etc. will have a continuous effect, as they will work for

more hours in a day continuously.

2.7.9 Water Consumption, Waste Water Generation & Disposal Details

Details of Water Consumption and Waste water generation

Total water consumption will be 9.3 KLD, out of which 6.5 KLD will be fresh water and 2.8

KLD will be recycled water. Fresh water will be sourced from Sarigam GIDC. Letter of water

permission is enclosed as Annexure 4. Details of Water consumption is given in Table 2-20.

Table 2-20: Water Consumption & Wastewater Generation

S. No. Particulars Water Consumption (KLD) Wastewater generation (KLD)

1 Domestic 1 0.8

2 Processing 0 0

3 Boiler 0.5 0.1

4 Cooling 3 1.7

5 Floor / container / equipment washing

1 1

6 Scrubber 2.8 0

7 Gardening 1 0

Grand Total 9.3 3.6

Total Industrial 7.3 2.8



Wastewater Generation and disposal method:

Domestic effluent will be disposed through septic tank of adequate capacity. Total Industrial

wastewater generation will be 2.8 KLD mainly from boiler blow down; cooling tower blow

down and floor washing. The effluent will be treated into ETP. First waste water will be

collected, pH will be balanced and then the wastewater will be filtered and utilized for

scrubber. Thus there will be no discharge of any industrial effluent. The proposed unit will be

a Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD) Unit. Details of wastewater generation is given in Table 2-21.

Table 2-21: Wastewater generation, treatment and disposal details

Type/Source Quantity of Waste Water

Generated (KLD) Treatment

Capacity (KLD) Treatment

Method Mode of Disposal

Industrial 2.8 5 ETP Recycle

Domestic 0.8 NA NA Sepctic Tank

Figure 2-5: Water Banlance Diagram

Design of ETP:

The effluent treatment plant will be designed based on following design paramters

Average hydraulic load, m3/day : 2.8 KLD

Design hydraulic load, m3/day : 5 m3/day

Average Inlet BOD, mg/L : <20 mg/L

Average Inlet COD, mg/L : <100 mg/L

Water Balance Diagram

Total water consumption, 9.3 M3/day (Fresh: 6.5 + Recycled: 2.8 ) Source from GIDC Sarigam

Domestic: 1.0Scrubber: 2.8 Boiler: 0.5Cooling: 3.0Floor/ container/equipmentWashing: 1.0

Gardening: 1.0

0Blow Down: 0.1Blow Down: 1.7 Septic tank: 0.8

ETP: 0.1ETP: 1.7

1.0

ETP: 1.0

Total effluent: 2.8

pH Correction and Filteration

Utilize for Scrubber: 2.8 M3/day



Table 2-22: Design paramters of Effluent Treatment Plant

S. No. Parameter Unit Untreated Treated

1 pH -- 7.5 to 9.0 6.5 to 8.5

2 Colour Pt-Co Scale 200 (max) <100

3 Suspended Solids mg/lit 250 (max) <100

4 Biochemical Oxygen Demand mg/lit 20 (max) <10

5 Chemical Oxygen Demand mg/lit 100 (max) <50

6 Oil and Grease mg/lit 2 (max) <1

7 Total Dissolved Solids mg/lit 1800 (max) <1800

Effluent Treatment Plant having specification mentioned in Table 2-23 will be installed.

Table 2-23: Effluent Treatment Scheme

S. No Name of the unit Size (m) Capacity (m3)

MOC No.

1 Collection cum pH correction

tank with air sparger 2 x 2 x 2 6 RCC 1

2 Dilute acid dosing tank - 0.2 HDPE 1

3 Filter nutsch 1 x 1 x1 1 MSRL with PP

filter cloth 1

4 Final holding tank 2 x 2 x 2 6 RCC 1

Figure 2-6: Flow Diagram of Proposed Effluent Treatment Plant

1 - Collection cum pH correction tank with air sparger

2 - Dilute acid dosing tank

3 - Filter nutsch

2

4

FLOW DIAGRAM OF PROPOSED EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT

1

3

Inlet

To Scrubbing System



4 - Final holding tank

2.7.10 Solid and Hazardous Waste Identification, Quantification, Storage and

Disposal

Solid and Hazardous Waste Identification, Quantification, Storage and Disposal details are provided below in Table 2-24.

Table 2-24: Solid and hazardous Waste details

Name of

Waste Item

Category

Quantity per

Annum Unit

Distance from Site (Km)

Mode of Transport

Treatment Mode of Disposal

ETP waste

Hazardous

Waste

35.3 (Sch.I)

1.0 Tonn

es 10 truck

Dried, packed in

bags

Will be disposed off into TSDF,

Vapi through SIA, Sarigam

Used Oil

Hazardous

Waste

5.1

(Sch.I) 0.05

Tonnes

10 truck Packed in carboys

Will be sold to Registered

re-processers

Discarded

containers

Hazardous

Waste

33.1

(Sch.I) 1.0

Tonnes

10 truck De-

contaminated stored

Will be sold to authorized

recycler

Phosphric acid (60%)

Hazardous

Waste

29.6

(Sch.I) 1440 TPA 10 Tanker

Packing

Sell to authorized

users having permission

under Rule 9 of the H/W rules 2016

2.7.11 Project Layout and Components

The proposed project is located in notified industrial estate and letter of allotment is enclosed

as Annexure 2.

The total area of the plot is 2351.25 m2. Greenbelt will be developed in 21% of the total area.

The site layout map is provided in Map 2-4. The area breakup of plant layout is provided

below in Table 2-25.

Table 2-25: Area breakup

S. No. Particulars Area (m2)

1. Production area/ Main Plant 550

2. Raw material storage area 75

3. Finished product storage 75

4. Office and laboratory area 100

5. Toilet block and others 20



6. Utility and boiler 50

7. Solid and hazardous waste storage 15

8. ETP 15

9. Greenbelt 500

10. Parking area 150

11. Open space 801.25

Total 2351.25

24%

7%

4%

4%

21%

6%

34%

Area Breakup

Production area

Storage area

Office and laboratory area

Utility and other

Gardening and plantation

Parking area

Open space



Map 2-4:Site map with Green Belt Development Planning



2.7.12 Mitigation Measures at Design Stage

Details of mitigation measures adopted at design stage are provided in Table 2-26.

Table 2-26: Details of Mitigation Measures at Design Stage

Name of Plant Environmental

Attributes

Operational Controls at Design Stage

Air Noise Water SHW

Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act – 1981 and

Rules, 1982 as amended to date

The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 as amended

to date

Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act – 1974 and Rules 1975

as amended to date

Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and

Trans boundary Movement) Rules, 2016 as amended to

date

Proposed Project for the

Manufacture of Pesticides

(Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc

Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide Technical)

Energy Energy efficiency will be considered during technology selection

Air --

Acoustic Enclosures will be provided to D.G sets

Adequate green belt surrounding the premises will be

provided to cut the noise going out of plant area

Ear plugs will be provided to workers.

-- --

PM,NOx, SO2 Chimney attached with

steam boiler and D, G set -- -- --

P2O5 Two stage water scrubber -- -- --

Waste Water -- --

Industrial Effluent : ETP

Sewage Water: Septic tank

--

Solid and Hazardous Waste

-- -- --

ETP waste: Sent to TSDF

Used Oil: Will be sold to Registered re-processers.

Discarded containers: Will be sold to authorized recycler

Psophoric acid (60%) will be



Name of Plant Environmental

Attributes

Operational Controls at Design Stage

Air Noise Water SHW

Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act – 1981 and

Rules, 1982 as amended to date

The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 as amended

to date

Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act – 1974 and Rules 1975

as amended to date

Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and

Trans boundary Movement) Rules, 2016 as amended to

date

Sell to authorized users having permission under

Rule 9 of the H/W rules 2016



2.7.13 Assessment of New and Untested Technology

The manufacturing will be carried out using established manufacturing process. It is basic

technique which create least environmental impact. Hence there will be no use of any new

and untested technology for the proposed project.

2.7.14 Condensed Description

The condensed description of those aspects of the project likely to cause environmental

effects is given in Table 2-27.

Table 2-27: Details of Condensed Description

S. No.

Activity Aspects

Project Pre- Construction/ Construction

1 Site clearance Removal of top soil & Land clearance

2 Excavation and paving of

site

Generation of debris

Dust generation

Fall in pit, land sliding from sidewalls

3 Fabrication work for plant equipment land preventive

maintenance work

Generation of scraps

Noise generation

4

Vehicular movement for transportation of

construction material and waste

Emission of HC & CO

Noise generation

5 Influx of workers during

construction phase

Sewage generation

Employment generation

Commissioning/ Project Operation

1 Reactions, Processes

Emission of PM, SO2and NOx from D.G & Boiler

Generation of waste water from Cooling and Boiler Blow Down

Noise generation from D.G Set

2 Export of Product Increase in market scenario

General & Utilities

1 Operation of D.G Set,

Cooling tower, Boiler, etc.

Emission of PM, SO2 and NOx from D.G & Boiler Generation of waste water from Cooling and Boiler Blow Down


2 Equipment and Floor

Washing Generation of waste water

3 Operation of ETP Generation of waste water

Generation of ETP waste

4 Influx of workers

operational phase

Sewage generation

Employment Generation

5 Green belt developement Reduce air pollution, Noise

6 Loading and Unloading of chemicals, products etc.

Generation of Waste Drums/Barrels/bags and containers

7

Vehicular movement for transportation of raw

materials, finished goods and Industrial Waste

Increase in traffic load

Emission of HC & CO

Noise generation

8 Raw water intake for Plant Consumption of water



S. No.

Activity Aspects

Operation and Domestic Uses

9 Equipment maintenance Generation of used oil and lubricants

Generation of scraps and used spares etc.



3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies within the probable

impact zone for various components of the environment viz. Air, Noise, Water, Soil, Ecology

& Bio diversity and Socio-economy. The baseline environmental study has been conducted

for the study region within 10 km radius. An exhaustive attempt has been made in the

current chapter to disclose all possible baseline status of environmental quality in the study

area, which further serves as the basis for identification, prediction and evaluation of

impacts. Villages covered within study region are shown in the Map 3-1.

Map 3-1: Study Area Map

3.1 BASELINE STUDY AREA AND PERIOD

The baseline environmental study has been conducted for the study region within 10 km

radius of the project site for the period 1st Oct 2018 to 31st Dec 2018. An exhaustive attempt

has been made in the current chapter to disclose all possible base line status of

environmental quality in the vicinity of the project, which further serves as the basis for

identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts. Study area map covering all the villages

are shown in the Map 3-1.



3.2 METHODOLOGY

The baseline environmental study was carried out for the various environmental components

viz, Air, Water, Soil, Ecology and Biodiversity, Socio Economy and Noise. A desktop study

was carried out to select the sampling locations and site visit was done by our field area

experts. After the site visit, locations were finalized. During the submission of field area

expert report and discussion looking to the extent of impact, 5 km radius was considered as

core zone and rest 5 km radius was considered as buffer zone. All the locations have been

selected within 10 km radius from the project site as per the requirement of TOR and

environmental samples were collected from the selected locations of the study area. Before

starting the survey activity for ecology and bio diversity, secondary data were used as

reference during the desktop survey for listing the species of study zone and planning the

survey. In case of socio economy, secondary data have also been used for deciding the

parameters to be surveyed during socio economic data collection. As a secondary source of

data, for Ecology and Biodiversity survey various publications by the government of India

and literature available on internet site were used. Some photograph showing the monitoring

and survey activities are presented in Photograph 3-1.

3.2.1 Frequency of Sampling

Details of frequency of environmental sampling considered for the study are illustrated in

Table 3-1.

Table 3-1: Frequency of Environmental Monitoring

Attributes

Sampling

Locations Parameters Frequency

A. Air Environment

Micro-meteorological Data

Nr. Project Site Temperature, Relative Humidity, Precipitation Wind direction, Wind

Speed.

Hourly data for the period 1

st Oct 2018 to

31st Dec 2018.

Ambient Air Quality 8 numbers of locations in the study area of 10 km

radius.

PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx and CO

24 hour basis, twice a week during study

period

B. Noise 8 numbers of locations in the study area of 10 km

radius.

Noise Levels in dB (A). Once in Study Period.

C. Water

Ground Water Samples from 7 numbers of locations within 10 km radius from the project

site.

Physical, Chemical, Microbiological and

Heavy Metal.

Once in Study Period.

Surface Water Samples from 6 numbers of locations within 10 km radius from the project

site.

Physical, Chemical, Microbiological and

Heavy Metal.




Marine Water Samples from 1 number of location during high tide and low tide within 10 km radius from the

project site.

Physical, Chemical, Microbiological, Zooplankton,

Phytoplankton, Benthos, Sediment and

Heavy Metal.


D. Soil Quality Samples from 4 numbers of locations within 10 km radius from the project

site.

Physical, Chemical Characteristics, Soil

Texture.


3.2.2 Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis

The methods adopted for environmental sampling and analysis are illustrated in following Table 3-2.

Table 3-2: Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis

Attributes

Methods

Sampling/Preservation Analysis/data analysis

A. Air Environment

Micro-meteorological

Data Data collected on hourly basis using wind

monitor as per CPCB Guideline. NA

Ambient air quality As per IS: 5182, CPCB & AWMA. As per IS:5182,CPCB & AWMA

B. Noise Instrument : Sound level meter Survey carried out as per CPCB guideline.

C. Water

Ground Water, Surface Water and Marine Water

Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater, 23

rd edition, APHA

2017.

IS 3025 & Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater,

23rd

edition, APHA 2017.

D. Soil Quality

IS 2720, Soil Testing in India (Department of Agriculture & Cooperation).

IS 2720, Laboratory developed Method as per NABL requirement and Book - Soil

Testing in India (Department of Agriculture & Cooperation).

Photograph 3-1: Photograph Showing The Sampling Activity



EB Survey Ambient air – Sarigam

Punat – Noise Project Site – Ambient air

Ground water - Sarigam village Surface water – Daman ganga River



Surface River – Darotha River SE Survey

3.3 MICROMETEOROLOGY

The study of micro meteorological data helps to understand the variations in the ambient air

quality status in that region. The prevailing micrometeorological condition at project site

plays a crucial role in transport and dispersion of air pollutants. The persistence of the

predominant wind direction and wind speed at the project site decide the direction and extent

of the air pollution impact zone. The principal variables which affect the micrometeorology

are horizontal transport and dispersion, convective transport and vertical mixing and

topography of the area towards local influences. Micrometeorological data were collected by

using the wind monitor as per CPCB guideline which was installed near project site. All the

micrometeorological data were collected on hourly basis. Meteorological conditions of the

study area are presented in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3: Meteorological Condition of Study Area

Month Temperature (

oC) Relative Humidity (%) Wind Speed (km/hr)

Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Oct'18 21.7 38.1 22.0 93.0 0.1 8.0

Nov'18 18.0 37.0 24.0 90.0 0.1 7.0

Dec'18 13.2 33.2 22.0 95.0 0.1 10.0



3.3.1 Temperature

During the study period minimum temperature was recorded 13.2oC on 29th Dec 2018 and maximum temperature was recorded as 38.1oC on 02nd

Oct 2018. Temperature data were collected on hourly basis during the study period. Variation of temperature is graphically presented in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1: Graphical Presentation for the month wise Temperature Variation

3.3.2 Humidity

Humidity affects the nature and characteristics of pollutants in the atmosphere as it is the measure of amount of moisture in the atmosphere.

Humidity helps suspended particulate matter to coalesce and grow in size to settle under the gaseous pollutants by providing them aqueous

medium. During the study period minimum Humidity was recorded 22% on 22th Oct 2018 and 19th Dec 2018 and maximum Humidity was recorded

as 95% on 11h Dec 2018. The variation in humidity is represented graphically in Figure 3-2.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Max. 36 38 36 37 36 37 37 37 35 37 35 37 37 37 35 37 36 34 36 37 35 37 37 36 36 36 36 35 36 34 34 35 35 37 36 34 36 34 34 34 34 36 35 36 32 35 35 34 35 35 35 34 36 35 35 33 33 34 34 33 33 31 32 33 31 31 32 32 30 31 30 30 30 29 28 28 30 28 29 28 29 30 31 32 30 30 26 27 26 29 30 28

Min. 24 25 27 27 27 28 27 27 26 26 27 26 25 24 24 25 24 26 26 26 23 22 21 22 21 23 22 21 22 24 23 23 23 24 25 25 24 22 21 19 19 19 19 21 20 20 20 19 19 20 21 21 23 25 24 23 21 21 20 19 18 17 16 20 21 19 20 17 16 18 17 17 19 18 19 18 18 18 14 13 15 15 15 16 17 17 15 13 13 13 17 17

0.0

5.0

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

35.0

40.0

45.0

Tem

per

atu

re (

oC

)



Figure 3-2: Graphical Presentation for the month wise Humidity Variation

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Max. 82 83 87 92 83 79 71 88 92 88 92 87 82 82 80 80 93 90 85 80 73 74 84 76 71 86 78 66 60 51 60 71 70 80 75 80 69 60 68 78 78 82 76 83 90 85 68 81 83 81 76 78 76 72 67 69 65 68 80 74 81 86 84 75 86 77 70 84 84 89 85 95 91 81 76 86 81 69 59 57 65 65 68 82 70 60 78 80 79 84 80 75

Min. 44 53 62 56 38 43 36 39 63 49 71 34 38 35 45 26 50 62 42 40 45 22 26 38 25 42 40 38 23 27 26 38 42 40 34 58 34 38 36 38 35 38 26 25 58 30 24 32 38 42 33 45 42 41 34 44 36 38 38 36 40 39 42 43 44 41 36 36 34 52 56 54 45 38 48 58 50 32 40 22 30 40 24 43 34 32 32 33 36 35 42 38

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

Hu

mid

ity

(%)



3.3.3 Wind Speed and Wind Direction

Hourly wind speed data were collected for the period 1st Oct 2018 to 31st Dec 2018 with the

help of wind monitor. The rate of dispersion, diffusion and transportation of pollutants in the

atmosphere mainly depend on wind speed and its direction. Wind direction and velocity data

have been collected during the study period. Dominant wind direction in the study period

was from NE –SW during the study period. Wind speed was observed from 0.1 to 8.0 km/hr

in the month of Oct 2018, from 0.1 to 7.0 km/hr in the month of Nov 2018 and from 0.1 to

10.0 km/hr in the Month of Dec 2018. Month-wise maximum and minimum wind speed data

are tabulated in Table 3-3.

3.3.4 Wind Rose

Wind rose diagram is a graphical representation of the magnitude and direction of wind

speed considering all the directions. From the knowledge of wind rose one can easily predict

the direction and extent of spreading of the gaseous and particulate matter from the source.

Wind rose diagram has been prepared by using hourly wind velocity and dominant wind

direction data and is presented in Figure 3-3.



Figure 3-3:Wind Rose Diagram



3.3.5 Interpretation of Micrometeorological Data

During the study, wind blow was in the direction of NE-SW and wind speed range 0.1 to 10.0

km/hr. Based on the wind direction and wind speed it is interpreted that maximum dispersion

of air pollutant will be in SW direction during the period of Oct to Dec.

3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT

Air is the Earth‟s atmosphere having the gases in which living organisms live and breathe

but air is being deteriorated day by day due to the anthropogenic and natural sources. In

present scenario Industrialization, Energy production and the burning of fossil fuels has

polluted the air environment. Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out for the

assessment of the existing status of background air quality in the study area. This will be

useful for assessing the conformity of the ambient air quality to the standards even after

commencement of the proposed project.

3.4.1 Selection of Sampling Locations

Following points were considered during the selection of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

locations.

Topography/terrain of the study area,

Regional synoptic scale climatologically norm‟s,

Densely populated areas within the region,

Location of surrounding Industries,

Representation of regional background,

Facility for Ambient Air Monitoring,

Representation of valid cross – sectional distribution in downwind direction,

Avoidance of proximity of roads, construction activity or any other perturbing activity

which may be temporary in nature, which may lead to some erroneous conclusions.

Availability of manpower, electricity, approach, sturdy structure and protection of

samplers.

Dominant Wind Direction.

To establish the baseline status around the project site of the study region, monitoring was

conducted for 8 numbers of locations during 1st Oct 2018 to 31st Dec 2018. At the time of

location selection previous micrometeorological data was referred and general wind pattern

in the study region was considered for the selection of minimum one location in the

downwind direction. However, ambient air monitoring locations were selected in all the

directions looking towards the possibility of change in wind pattern during the study period.

Ambient Air Quality monitoring locations are presented in Map 3-2 and Table 3-4.



Map 3-2: Map showing the Study Region location of Ambient Air

Table 3-4:Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations in the Study Region

Code Location Distance/Direction Latitude and Longitude

Selection Criteria

A1 Project Site - 20°17'12.29"N 72°50'46.23"E

-

A2 Punat 5.6 km/ NEE 20°19'33.35"N

72°52'04.72"E Upwind

A3 Sarigam 2.0 km/ E 20°17'16.49"N

72°51'47.90"E Crosswind

A4 Sarai 4.6 km/ WSW 20°16'21.85"N

72°48'28.72"E Downwind

A5 Malav 6.34 km/ SSE 20°13'52.51"N


A6 Fansa 7.94 km/ NW 20°20'08.23"N


A7 Pali Karambeli 8.96 km/ N 20°21'43.46"N


A8 Chandor 9.58 km/ NE 20°21'28.42"N

72°53'53.75"E Upwind

3.4.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Sampling team was appointed with one FAE and Technical Assistant to carry out Ambient

Air Quality Monitoring for 8 numbers of locations within 10 km radius from the project site.

Sampling and analysis was carried out as per CPCB, IS 5182 & EPA and instrument



operation manual for the parameters PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx and CO. After the completion of

sampling, samples were brought to the laboratory in Ice box and filter box for analysis.

Frequency of sampling was twice a week during study period.

3.4.3 Methodology for Sampling and Analysis

Samples were collected by using the PM10 and PM2.5 micron dust samplers at suitable height

from obstruction free area as per the availability of the facility. Sampling and Analysis was

carried out as per CPCB Guideline, instrument operational manual and National

Environmental Engineering Research Institute. Detail of reference method is presented in

Table 3-5.

Table 3-5:Details of Analysis Method

Sr. No. Parameters Test Method

i. Particular matter (PM 2.5) SOP No. WI/5.4/02-B/03,Issue No.1

Date:01/01/2010, CPCB Guideline

ii. Particulate Matter (PM10) IS 5182 (Part 13):2006/Reaffirmed 2012

iii. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) IS 5182 (Part 2):2001/Reaffirmed 2012

iv. Oxide of Nitrogen (NOx) IS 5182 (Part 6):2006

v. Carbon monoxide (CO) Methods of Air sampling and Analysis 3rd

Edition by James P. Lodge JR. Editor AWMA. (CO Analyzer)

3.4.4 Quality of Ambient Air

Minimum, maximum, average and 98th percentile values for the parameters PM2.5, PM10,

SO2, NOx and CO are tabulated in Table 3-6 to Table 3-8 to describe the quality of Ambient

Air.

Table 3-6: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of PM10 and PM2.5

Code

PM10 (µg/m3) PM2.5 (µg/m

3)

Min. Percentile

98th

Max. Avg. Min.

Percentile

98th

Max. Avg.

A1 67.4 83.2 85.5 75.1 37.4 46.3 47.1 41.4

A2 65.3 79.8 80.1 72.6 34.5 41.9 42.6 37.6

A3 68.2 80.2 80.3 74.2 33.1 42.8 43.1 37.7

A4 71.1 85.7 86.1 77.2 37.2 46.2 46.7 41.3

A5 64.3 79.5 79.8 72.6 34.2 44.7 44.3 38.2

A6 66.7 82.4 83.1 73.6 35.4 43.4 43.6 39

A7 69.8 84.4 85.2 77.8 36.2 44.4 45.3 40.1



A8 61.9 77.3 78.2 70.9 32.0 41.8 42.2 37.5

NAAQ Standard limit as per new notification of

MoEF & CC on 24 hrs. basis

100 60

Table 3-7: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of SO2 and NOx

Code

SO2 (µg/m3) NOX (µg/m

3)

Min. Percentile

98th

Max. Avg. Min.

Percentile

98th

Max. Avg.

A1 12.7 17.5 17.6 15.3 18.2 23 23.0 20.8

A2 9.7 14.3 14.4 11.8 16.3 20.6 20.6 18.3

A3 10.1 14.3 14.4 12.2 16.7 22.7 22.8 19.7

A4 10.2 14.8 15.3 12.5 17.3 22.7 23.1 19.9

A5 10.5 14.8 15 13.3 16.2 20.8 20.8 19.5

A6 9.6 14.3 14.4 11.9 16.3 20.3 20.4 18.5

A7 10.5 15.3 15.4 13.7 17.1 21.4 21.4 20.0

A8 9.4 13.7 13.8 11.7 16.3 20.3 20.5 18.4

NAAQ Standard limit as per new notification of

MoEF & CC on 24 hrs. basis

80 80

Table 3-8: Min, Max, 98th Percentile and Average Value of CO

Code

CO (µg/m3)

Min. Percentile 98th

Max. Avg.

A1 573 688 688 631

A2 344 459 459 402

A3 344 459 459 402

A4 459 573 573 516

A5 459 573 573 516

A6 459 573 573 516

A7 344 459 459 402

A8 459 573 573 516

NAAQ Standard limit as per new notification of MoEF & CC on 8

hrs. basis 2000

3.4.5 Summary of Ambient Air Quality

Results were compared with the standard for ambient air quality monitoring as per

the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF & CC).

During the study PM10 was observed in the range of 61.9 – 86.1 µg/m3. Maximum

concentration of PM10 was found at sarai village.

PM2.5 was observed in the range of 32.0 – 47.1 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of

PM2.5 was found at project site.

SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 9.4 -17.6 µg/m3, which is well within

the standard limit.



NOx concentration in was observed in the range of 16.2- 23.0 µg/m3, which is well

within the standard limit.

P2O5 concentration in was observed <9.03 (Below Detective Limit).

Monitoring and analysis was also carried out for CO. Result for the CO was found

well within the norms.

3.4.6 Interpretation of Ambient Air Quality Data

Based on comparison study of results with NAAQS for tested parameters, ambient air quality

of studied locations can be considered good as all the results of tested parameters are well

within the limit. Looking towards the increasing pattern of PM10 and PM2.5 concentration in

ambient air, it is suggested that proper air pollution control measures must be adopted by

the industry. This interpretation relate to the results found during the monitoring for particular

location and date of monitoring.

3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

The objective of the baseline noise survey was to identify existing noise sources and to

measure background noise levels at the sensitive receptors within the study area. Peoples‟

perception of noise varies depending on number of factors including their natural sensitivity

and hearing ability, past experience of sound, cultural factors and the time of day at which

sound is experienced. Continuous sound is perceived quite differently from intermittent

sound at the same level. High or continuous noise levels may cause permanent loss of

hearing ranging from reduced perception at certain frequencies to total deafness. At

comparatively lower levels noise may have psychological effects including disturbance of

sleep, annoyance and irritation.

3.5.1 Sources of Noise Pollution

The sources of noise pollution in the study area are industrial noise, noise due to commercial

activities, noise generated by Community, Vehicular traffic etc.

3.5.2 Noise Level in the Study Area

Noise level monitoring was carried out with the help of sound level meter at 8 different

locations fall under residential, industrial and high noise generating source. Noise sampling

locations are presented in Map 3-3 and Table 3-9. Analysis results are presented in Table

3-10 and Table 3-11.



Map 3-3: Map showing the study region location of Noise

Table 3-9:Noise Monitoring Locations in the Study Region

Code Location Distance from

project site/Direction

Latitude and Longitude

Selection Criteria

N1 Project Site - 20°17'12.01"N 72°50'46.28"E

Industrial Area

N2 Punat 5.6 km/ NEE 20°19‟33.21”N

72°51‟46.46”E Residential Area

N3 Sarigam 2.0 km/ E 20°17‟15.52”N


N4 Sarai

4.6 km/ SWW 20°16‟22.69”N


N5 Malav 6.34 km/ SSE 20°13‟53.65”N


N6 Chandore 9.78 km/ NE 20°21‟32.13”N


N7 Bhilad-Sarigam-

Fansa Road 4.75 km/ SSE

20°18‟04.55”N

72°51‟01.93”E Road

N8 NH-8 near Dhanoli

village 1.84 km/ N

20°16‟06.02”N

72°53‟09.03”E Road

Table 3-10: Noise Monitoring report during day time



Code Lmin

dB

Ld dB(A)

Lmax

dB Zone

Limit dB(A) as per Noise Pollution (Regulation and

Control) Rules, 2000

N1 52.1 56.8 60.4 Industrial

75

N2 46.5 50.2 54.3 Residential 55

N3 46.8 50.8 54.5 Residential 55

N4 45.6 50.4 54.2 Residential 55

N5 47.2 51.1 54.7 Residential 55

N6 45.5 49.8 54.2 Residential 55

N7 73.4 77.1 83.4 Road -

N8 70.8 75.4 80.6 Road -

Table 3-11: Noise Monitoring report during night time

Code Lmin

dB

Ln

dB(A)

Lmax

dB Zone

Limit dB(A) as per Noise Pollution (Regulation and

Control) Rules, 2000

N1

48.5 51.6 55.2 Industrial 70

N2

40.1 42.4 44.8 Residential 45

N3

39.6 42.1 44.5 Residential 45

N4

39.8 42.6 44.2 Residential 45

N5

40.4 43.1 45.0 Residential 45

N6

39.5 43.0 44.7 Residential 45

N7

68.7 73.5 78.1 Road -

N8

65.5 68.8 73.4 Road -

Note: Day time –6.00 AM to 10.00 PM, Night time – 10.00 PM to 6.00 AM

Noise standards have been designated for different types of land use i.e. residential,

commercial, industrial areas and silence zones, as per „The Noise Pollution (Regulation and

Control) Rules, 2000, Notified by Ministry of Environment and Forests, New Delhi, February

14, 2000. Different standards have been stipulated for day (6 AM to 10 PM) and night (10

PM to 6 AM). The noise level study shows that the noise levels are meeting the acceptable

norms.



3.5.3 Summary of Noise Data

Equivalent noise level was recorded 56.8 dB (A) at Project Site and it is varies from

49.8 to 51.1 dB (A) in residential area during day time.

Equivalent noise level was recorded 51.6 dB (A) at Project Site and it is 42.1 to 43.1

dB (A) in residential area during night time.

Noise level monitoring was carried out 1 meter away from Bhilad-Sarigam-Fansa

Road near project site and equivalent noise level was recorded 77.1 dB (A) during

day time and 73.5 dB (A) during night time.

Noise level monitoring was carried out 1 meter away from NH-8 near Dhanoli village

and equivalent noise level was recorded 75.4 dB (A) during day time and 68.8 dB

(A) during night time.

3.5.4 Interpretation of Noise Data

Based on noise level data obtained during the survey for residential area and industrial area,

it is interpreted that noise levels are within the standard norms prescribed by MoEF & CC.

Looking towards the increase in noise generating sources it is suggested that there is need

to apply noise reducing devices at noise generating sources and generate public awareness.

3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT

3.6.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study area

Studies on land use aspects of eco system play an important role to identify sensitive issues

and to take appropriate action for maintaining ecological homeostasis in the region. The

main objective of this section is to provide a baseline status of the area, so that temporal

changes due to the proposed project on the surroundings can be assessed in future.

Data Used: United States Geological Survey (USGS) Satellite Data: Land sat 8 cloud free

data has been used for Land use /Land cover analysis, Satellite Sensor–OLITIRS multi-

spectral digital data has been used for the preparation of land use/ land cover map of

present study. Survey of India reference map on 1:50,000 scales have been used for the

preparation of base map and geometric correction of satellite data. Ground truthing has been

carried out to validate the interpretation accuracy and reliability of remotely sensed data, by

enabling verification of the interpreted details and by supplementing with the information,

which cannot be obtained directly on satellite imagery.

Methodology: The methodology used for the study consists of following components.

Methodology Adopted for Thematic Data Extraction from the Satellite Imageries

ERDAS image processing 10.0 software and ARC/GIS 10.0 software were used for the

project. ERDAS 10.0 image processing software was used for digital processing of the

spatial data. Digital image processing techniques were applied for the mapping of the land

use land cover classes of the provided area from the satellite data. Methodology used for

land use classification and mapping is presented in Figure 3-4. Land use map is presented

in Map 3-4. Land Use Statistic (10 km) is presented in Figure 3-5 and Table 3-12



Figure 3-4:Methodology used for Land use Classification

Map 3-4:Land Use Map



Table 3-12: Land use Statistics (10 km)

(Source: Land use mapping and primary survey of the area)

Percentage (%) Area

(Sq.km) Land cover Land Use

Area (Sq.km)

Percentage (%)

8.86 27.87 Water body Water body 27.87 8.86

5.31 16.69

Settlement Settlement

16.69 5.31

51.61

162.30

Agriculture Land

Orchard 111.25 35.38

Crop Land 19.13 6.08

Fallow Land 31.93 10.15

14.23

44.73

Range Land

Grass Land 36.34 11.56

Scrub Land 8.39 2.67

7.06

22.19

Forest Area

PF 1.40 0.45

RF 20.79 6.61

12.93 40.97 Barren Land Waste Land 36.97 11.76

Muddy 3.70 1.18

100 314.45 Total 314.45 100

Figure 3-5: Land use Statistics (10 Km)

8.86 5.31

35.38

6.08

10.15

11.56

2.67

0.45 6.61

11.76

1.18 Water body

Settlement

Orchard

Crop Land

Fallow Land

Grass Land

Scrub Land

PF

RF

Waste land

Muddy

Land Use Statistic (10 km)



3.6.2 Summary and Interpretation of Land Use Map

The area surrounding the project site is largely an agriculture land area like Orchad, Crop

Land and Fallow Land are covering around 35.38%, 6.08% and 10.15% respectively of the

total study area. Water body is covering around 8.86 % of the total study area. Range Land

like Grass Land and Scrub Land are covering around 11.56% and 2.67% respectively of the

total study area. Forest area like PF and RF are covering around 0.45% & 6.41%

respectively of the total study area. Barren land like waste land and Muddy are covering

around 11.76% & 1.18% respectively of the total study area. Settlement is covering around

5.31% of the total study area.

3.7 GEOLOGY

The Proposed site is located in Valsad District, Gujarat. Valsad district can be divided to

three geographic units: hilly area (in the east), alluvial plain and coastal zone. Prominent

rivers of the district are the River Damanganga and the Kolak nadi, debauching into the

Arabian Sea. The average annual rainfall is 208 cm. The area consists predominantly of

basaltic flows intruded, profusely by the basic rocks. Basaltic lavas with „pahohoe‟ and „Aa;

volcanic characters form „compound‟ and „simple‟ flows. Some of the flows carry giant

phenocrysts of plagioclase. The basic dykes are basaltic to dolertic in nature and trend in N-

S to NNW-SSE, NW-SE, ENE-WSW and WNW-ESE directions. Compositionally, these are

similar to the lava types viz. normal tholeilite, olivine tholelite, pictrite basalt and giant

phenocryst basalt. The soils in the district are fine, loamy, clayey, mixed, montmorillonitic

and calcareous in nature. They are isohyperthermic, vertic ustropepts and typic chromusterts

and are moderately deep well drained, fine soils on very gently sloping foot-hills with

moderate erosion and slight stoniness. The bouger gravity anomaly varies between -70 to

+30 m Gal. The basement depth is about 1500 m in the western part which decreases

towards east. The area lies in the moderate risk zone (Zone – III) of seismic zonation.

3.8 HYDROGEOLOGY

The groundwater in Valsad district occurs in porous unconsolidated formations and fissure

formations both under water table conditions as well as under confined conditions. The

unconsolidated formations comprise gravel, sand, silt, clay and kankars while the fissure

formations mainly consist of basaltic rock. Generally the water table follows topographic

configuration. The depth to water is greater in upland areas whereas in valley portion and

shallow grounds, the levels are very close to surface. In hilly terrain of eastern, north-eastern

and southeastern part of the district, spring zones are seen in river section and also along

the section of the Daman Ganga, Kolak, Par & Auranga rivers of the district. In major part of

the district, basalt rock units form aquifers whereas alluvium deposits form aquifer system in

north western part and in central part along river courses and also all along narrow coastal

stripes of the district. The weathered basalts formations are covered by soil / muram, valley

fill and piedmont deposits forming potential aquifers in the vicinity of rivers and in the vast

undulating plains adjacent to hilly terrain. But their regional continuity and extension are

limited due to heterogeneous nature of deposits with limited thickness and lateral extension.



As such they rarely exceed a few square kilometers. The alluvium formation of Northwest

along coastal area has major constraint of quality, which have high TDS in ground water.

The interior patches have limited thickness and they form unique contiguous unconfined

system of alluvium portion and underlying weathered basalt rock units.

Range of water table Pre monsoon season 15-20 mbgl

Range of water table Post monsoon season 5-10 mbgl

3.9 TRAFFIC STUDY

Proposed project connects to National Highway No. 8 and State Highway No. 185. Proposed

project will attract to commercial vehicles as a result traffic load will also increase on

highways. Traffic load play a major role in polluting the air. To assess the traffic load, 4 no. of

surveyors were appointed to survey for National Highway No. 8 and State Highway No. 185.

Traffic data collected continuously for 24 hours by visual observation and counting of

vehicles under three categories, viz., heavy motor vehicles, light motor vehicles and

two/three wheelers. As traffic densities on the roads are high, two persons were deployed

simultaneously at each station during each shift- one person on each of the two directions

for counting the traffic. At the end of each hour, fresh counting and recording was

undertaken. Total numbers of vehicles per hour under the three categories were determined.

Traffic study is conducted on National Highway No. 8 and State Highway 185 from 10nd and

11th Dec 2018.

Table 3-13:Traffic Study Report

S.

No.

Vehicles

Distribution

No. of Vehicles/Day

Passenger Car Unit (PCU)

Total No. of Vehicle in PCU

Total No. of Vehicle

(PCU)/Hour

NH-8 SH-185

NH-8 SH-185

NH-8 SH-185

1. Cars 17562 8814 1.0 17562 8814 732 367

2. Buses 3024 714 3.0 9072 2142 378 89

3. Trucks 3328 802 3.0 9984 2406 416 100

4. Two wheelers 6914 4521 0.5 3457 2261 144 94

5. Three

wheelers 2538

1041 0.75 1904

781 79

33

Total 33366 15892 41979 16404 1749 683

Table 3-14: Existing Traffic Scenario with respect to LOS

V/C LOS Performance

Road V (Volume in

PCU/hr) C (Capacity in

PCU/hr) Existing V/C

Ratio LOS

NH-8 1749 3000 0.58 C

SH-5 683 1250 0.55 C



0.0-0.2 A Excellent

0.2-0.4 B Very Good

0.4-0.6 C Good/Average/Fair

0.6-0.8 D Poor

0.8-1.0 E Very Poor

3.9.1 Interpretation of Traffic Study

LOS values have been calculated based on traffic data on NH-8 and SH-5 and it has been

found 0.58 and 0.55 respectively. LOS value indicates that the performance of NH-8 and

SH-5 is good and Very good respectively.

3.10 SOIL QUALITY

4 numbers of samples were collected from different locations within 10 km radius to assess

the base line status of soil. Analysis was also carried out for physico-chemical parameters as

well as the parameters to define the texture class. Soil samples were collected by using core

cutter and brought to the laboratory in polythene bags. Standard procedures have been

followed for soil sampling and analysis. Soil sampling locations are presented in Map 3-5

and tabulated in Table 3.15. Results are presented in Table 3.16.

Map 3-5:Map showing the study region location of Soil



Table 3-15: Details of Soil sampling location

Code Location Distance from the

project site/Direction Latitude and Longitude

Selection Criteria

S1 Project Site - 20°17'12.27"N 72°50'46.61"E

Non Agriculture Land

S2 Chandor 9.78 km/ NE 20°21‟27.76”N

72°53‟51.65”E Non Agriculture Land

S3 Punat 5.6 km/ NEE 20°19‟32.78”N

72°52‟06.25”E Agriculture Land

S4 Sarigam 2.0 km/ E 20°17‟18.34”N

72°51‟54.73”E Agriculture Land

Table 3-16:Soil Sample Analysis Result

S. No Parameters Unit S1 S2 S3 S4

1 Water Holding Capacity % 29.4 28.8 34.8 35.4

2 Porosity % 20.2 18.8 22.4 24.2

2 Particle Size Distribution

a. Sand % 26.2 30.4 34.6 33.2

b. Silt % 25.4 21.8 27.4 28.4

c. Clay % 48.4 47.8 38.0 38.4

3 Texture - Clay Clay Clay Loam Clay

Loam

4 Cation Exchange Capacity meq/100 g 38.6 38.9 43.9 45.4

5 pH - 7.56 7.72 7.82 7.71

6 Electrical Conductivity dS/m 0.95 0.86 1.18 1.04

7 Exchangeable Sodium % 12.4 11.6 14.1 15.1

8 Exchangeable Calcium meq/100g 25.4 26.2 27.4 27.1

9 Exchangeable Magnesium meq/100g 7.2 6.8 8.6 8.0

10 Exchangeable Sodium meq/100g 4.8 4.5 6.2 6.6

11 Exchangeable Potassium meq/100g 1.2 1.4 1.7 2.0

12 Organic Carbon(OC) % 0.34 0.38 0.56 0.64

13 Total Nitrogen % 0.030 0.033 0.049 0.056

14 Nitrate N mg/100gm 6.8 6.2 10.7 11.2

15 Total Phosphorus mg/100gm 10.6 9.8 18.4 19.0

16 Total Iron mg/100gm 102.4 106.8 92.2 96.3

17 Total Zinc mg/100gm 2.4 2.6 3.6 3.1

18 Total Copper mg/100gm 0.5 0.7 1.2 1.4

19 Total Boron mg/100gm 1.56 1.66 2.32 2.16

20 Total Chromium mg/100gm 1.6 1.9 2.5 2.3



3.10.1 Summary of Soil Data

The soils are categorized as clay loam to clay based on different soil separates

(sand, silt and clay). They have moderate water holding capacity (28.8 to 35.6 %),

but poor drainage capacity as texture is clay loam to clay as nearly 77 % is silt + clay.

The soil is categorized as deep black having > 1m depth and lower layers are having

calcium nodules.

The pH of the soil samples narrowly ranged from 7.48 to 7.76 during the study

period. The soil EC also varied from 0.86 to1.18 dS/m and ESP ranged from 11.6 to

15.1. These parameters indicate that soils are neutral to alkaline in reaction, saline

(EC > 0.8 dS/m), but normal to sodic as ESP is exceeding 15 in one out of four

samples.

Among exchangeable basic cations predominance of calcium (25.4 to 27.4 meq/100

g soil) was seen followed by Mg (6.8 –8.6 meq/100 g soil), Na (4.5 to 6.6 meq/100 g

soil) and K (1.2 to 2.0 meq/100 g soil). The loss on ignition (0.2 to 0.6 % OC) indicate

that soils are low (<0.5 % OC) to medium (> 0.5 – 0.75 % OC) in organic carbon

status. This shows that soils are low to medium in nitrogen status.

Considering only 2% available phosphorus based on total P, soils are classified as

poor (>28 kg P2O5/ha) in available P. The based on exchangeable potassium values

soils are categorized as high (>280 kg K2O/ha. The results relating to total Fe, Cu,

Cr, B and Zn do not show alarming concentrations in different soil samples.

3.10.2 Interpretation of Soil Data

Based on soil analysis data it is concluded that soils are normal to saline from salinity view

point and non-sodic as ESP is < 15 at the site. The soils are low to medium in nitrogen, low

in phosphorus and high in potassium. The levels of total Fe, Cu, Cr, B and Zn are within the

safe limits. However, for successful greenbelt development liberal quantity of organic

manure (50 tons/ha) and double the quantity of recommended doses of N, and P and half

the dose of K fertilizers should be applied. The soil at the project site requires amelioration.

Apply acid forming amendments like sulphur/iron pyrite for removal of excess sodium from

the exchange complex with provision of adequate drainage. The soil should be periodically

monitored for EC, pH and ESP.

3.11 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Physical, Chemical and Microbiological factors influencing water quality are so interrelated

that a change in any water quality parameter may trigger other changes in a complete

network of interrelated variables. Selected water quality parameters for surface and ground

water resources along with biological indicators within study region have been used for water

environment and assessing the impact on it by proposed project. A study on water

environment aspects of ecosystem plays an important role in environmental assessment to

identify water related sensitive issues.



3.11.1 Reconnaissance

As a significant part of predefined framework of the present study water samples were

collected from selected locations. The Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and

monitoring locations were finalized based on:

Presence, Location and uses of major water bodies in the region,

Type and Location of Industrial/residential areas, their intake and effluent disposal

locations,

Likely areas that can represent baseline conditions.

3.11.2 Water Quality

With the start of water quality study, the water resources in the study area were divided into

three categories for getting ideal upshot of baseline status of water quality of the region.

These three categories as determined are:

Ground water resources (tube well, open well, springs etc.)

Surface water resources including ponds, river, canals.

Marine water

3.11.3 Sampling and Analysis

All the water samples were collected and analyzed as per “Standard Methods for

Examination of Water & Wastewater”, APHA 23rd edition, 2017. Water Samples for the

analysis of physico-chemical parameters were collected in plastic carboy and parameter

wise preserved onsite as per the technique defined in the book of APHA 23rd edition, 2017.

Temperature, pH and DO were analyzed onsite and samples were brought to the laboratory

for the analysis of remaining parameters.

3.11.4 Ground Water

To assess the quality of ground water, samples were collected from 7 numbers of locations

for the analysis of physico-chemical and microbiological parameters. Ground water sampling

locations are presented in Table 3-17 and Map 3-6. Analysis results are presented Table

3-18.



Map 3-6: Map showing the study region with locations for Ground Water

Table 3-17: Details of Ground Water sampling locations


project site/Direction

Latitude and Longitude

Source

GW1 Punat 5.6 km/ NEE 20°19‟34.53”N

72°52‟04.06”E Bore well

GW2 Sarai 4.6 km/ SWW 20°16‟24.72”N

72°48‟28.34”E Bore well

GW3 Sarigam 2.0 km/ E 20°17‟14.41”N

72°51‟48.48”E Bore well

GW4 Malav 6.34 km/ SSE 20°13‟51.96”N

72°51‟45.08”E Bore well

GW5 Fansa 7.94 km/ NW 20°20‟07.71”N

72°47‟24.90”E Bore well



GW6 Pali karambeli 8.46 km/ N 20°21‟42.36”N

72°50‟28.72”E Bore well

GW7 Chandor 9.78 km/ NE 20°21‟27.94”N

72°53‟54.65”E Bore well



Table 3-18: Ground water Analysis Results

S. No.

Parameters Unit GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5

GW6

GW7

Drinking Water Specification IS 10500: 1992 (Reaffirmed 2012)

Desirable

Limit Permissible Limit

1. Temperature 0C 25.5 25.0 25.5 25.0 25.5 25.0 25.5 -- --

2. pH @ 250C pH Unit 7.14 7.28 7.26 7.32 7.22 7.15 7.18 6.5 – 8.5 No Relaxation

3. Colour Hazen <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 5 15

4. Odour -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable --

5. TDS @ 1800C mg/L 602 745 804 744 854 826 924 500 2000

6. Conductivity µmho/cm 932 1138 1242 1148 1356 1298 1418 -- --

7. TSS mg/L <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 -- --

8. Turbidity NTU 1.4 2.2 1.9 1.5 2.1 2.1 2.3 -- --

9. Total Hardness

as CaCO3 mg/L 384 442 544 462 542 528 584 200 600

10. Calcium mg/L 105 102 98 78 108 102 102 75 200

11. Total Alkalinity

as CaCO3 mg/L 292 342 480 416 488 462 502 200 600

12. Chloride mg/L 148 198 184 178 192 186 202 250 1000

13. Magnesium mg/L 29 42 73 65 66 66 80 30 100

14. Sulphate mg/L 32 24 20 18.4 15.6 20.1 20.2 200 400

15. Total

Phosphorus (PO4-P)

mg/L 1.4 1.7 1.8 1.3 2.1 1.9 2.1 -- --

16. Sodium mg/L 70 102 105 100 114 98 120 -- --

17. Potassium mg/L 12 7 8 12 14 10 18 -- --



18. Fluoride mg/L 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.5 1.0 1.5

19. Phenolic

Compound mg/L <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 0.001 0.002

20. Oil and Grease mg/L <1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 -- --

21. Dissolved Oxygen

mg/L 5.3 5.2 5.0 5.2 5.1 5.3 5.4 -- --

22. Nitrate mg/L 0.6 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 45 No Relaxation

23. Total Nitrogen mg/L 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 - -

24. Iron mg/L 0.28 0.19 0.24 0.14 0.26 0.25 0.26 0.3 No Relaxation

25. Copper mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 0.05 1.5

26. Boron mg/L 0.08 <0.01 0.05 0.08 0.07 0.08 0.07 0.5 1.0

27. Chromium mg/L <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 0.05 No Relaxation

28. Zinc mg/L 0.12 <0.1 0.16 0.14 0.11 0.14 0.11 5 15

29. Total Coliform Present/Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Shall not be detectable in any100

ml of sample



3.11.5 Summary of Ground Water Quality

The test results were compared with the Drinking Water Specification: IS: 10500, 1992

(Reaffirmed 2012) and it is summarized as under.

pH was observed in the range of 7.14 – 7.32 which meets with desirable norms.

Total dissolved solid were recorded in the range of 602 to 924 mg/L with minimum at

Punat village and maximum at Chandor village.

Total hardness was in the range of 384-584 mg/L with minimum at Punat village &

maximum at Chandor village.

Total Alkalinity was found in the range of 292-502 mg/L with minimum at Punat village &


Iron was found in the range of 0.14-0.28 mg/L with minimum at malav village and

maximum at Punat village.

As microbiological parameters MPN analysis was also carried out and it was found Nil.

3.11.6 Interpretation of Ground Water Quality Data

On the basis of test results obtained it is interpreted that results of all village meet with the

drinking water standard IS 10500:2012. These water sources can be used in drinking as well

as all domestic purposes. To save the ground water from contamination and improving the

quality, rainwater harvesting and ground water recharging may be helpful.

3.11.7 Surface Water

To assess the quality of Surface water, samples were collected from 2 numbers of locations

for the analysis of physico-chemical and microbiological parameters. Frequency of sampling

was once during the study period. Sampling and analysis was carried out as per “Standard

Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater APHA 23rd edition, 2017. Surface water

sampling locations are presented in the Table 3-19 and Map 3-7. Analysis results are

presented in Table 3-20 & Table 3-21.



Map 3-7: Map showing the locations for Surface water

Table 3-19:Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations


project Site/Direction

Latitude and Longitude Source

SW1. Darotha River 5.9 km/NE 20°19'47.02"N

72°52'38.75"E River

SW2. Damanganga River 9.1 km/NE 20°20'22.38"N

72°54'39.06"E River

Table 3-20: Surface water Analysis Results

S.

No. Parameters Unit SW1 SW2

Drinking Water Specification

IS 10500: 1992/(Reaffirmed 2012)

Desirable

Limit

Permissible

Limit

1. Temperature 0C 24.5 24.0 - -

2. pH @ 250C pH Unit 7.96 8.02 6.5 – 8.5 No Relaxation

3. Colour Hazen 10 8.04 5 15

4. Odour - Unobjectionable Unobjectionable Agreeable -

5. TDS @ 1800C mg/L 354 186 500 2000

6. Conductivity µmho/cm 556 290 - -

7. TSS mg/L 10 8 - -

8. Total

Hardness as CaCO3

mg/L 208 114

200 600



S.

No. Parameters Unit SW1 SW2

Drinking Water Specification

IS 10500: 1992/(Reaffirmed 2012)

Desirable

Limit

Permissible

Limit

9. Calcium mg/L 52 27 75 200

10. Total Alkalinity

as CaCO3 mg/L

182 84 200 600

11. Chloride mg/L 96 44 250 1000

12. Magnesium mg/L 19 11 30 100

13. Sulphate mg/L 12 16 200 400

14. Total

Phosphorus mg/L

1.4 1.8 - -

15. Sodium mg/L 55 24 - -

16. Potassium mg/L 6 3 - -

17. Fluoride mg/L 0.8 0.6 1.0 1.5

18. Phenolic Comp.

mg/L <0.1 <0.1

0.001 0.002

19. Oil and Grease mg/L <1.0 <1.0 - -

20. Dissolved Oxygen

mg/L 4.7 4.9

- -

21. COD mg/L 20 10 - -

22. BOD(3 days at

27 0C)

mg/L 6 4

- -

23. Nitrate mg/L 0.8 0.6 45 No Relaxation

24. Total Nitrogen mg/L 1.4 1.1 - -

25. Iron mg/L 0.38 0.30 0.3 No Relaxation

26. Copper mg/L <0.05 <0.05 0.05 1.5

27. Boron mg/L 0.1 0.08 0.5 1.0

28. Chromium mg/L <0.03 <0.03 0.05 No Relaxation

29. Zinc mg/L 0.14 0.12 Nil 15

Table 3-21:Bacteriological Analysis of surface Water

Code

Total coliform

Fecal coliform

Escherichia coli

Fecal Streptococci

Most Probable No (MPN): No/100 mL

SW1 20 18 <1.8 <1.8

SW2 16 14 <1.8 <1.8

Table 3-22:Standard limit as per IS 10500:2012 for Microbiological parameters

S.No. Organisams Requirements

1.

All water intended for drinking:

a) E. coli or thermo tolerant coliform

bacteria

Shall not be detectable in 100 ml sample

2.

Treated water entering the distribution system:


bacteria

b) Total coliform bacteria





3.

Treated water in the distribution system:


bacteria

b) Total coliform bacteria



1) Immediate investigative action shall be taken if either E.coli or total coliform bacteria are

detected. The minimum action in the case of total coliform bacteria is repeat sampling; if

these bacteria are detected in the repeat sample, the cause shall be determined by

immediate further investigation.

2) Although, E. coli is the more precise indicator of fecal pollution, the count of thermo

tolerant coli form bacteria is an acceptable alternative. If necessary, proper confirmatory

tests shall be carried out. Total coliform bacteria are not acceptable indicators of the sanitary

quality of rural water supplies, particularly in tropical areas where many bacteria of no

sanitary significance occur in almost all untreated supplies.

3) It is recognized that, in the great majority of rural water supplies in developing countries,

fecal contamination is widespread. Under these conditions, the national surveillance agency

should set medium-term targets for progressive improvement of water supplies.

3.11.8 Summary of Surface Water Quality

The following description is based on the analysis of the samples:

During the analysis pH of the samples was found in the range of 7.96-8.02.

TDS analysis was also carried out for surface water sample and it was found in the

range of 186-354 mg/L.

DO measured during analysis was found in the range of 4.7-4.9 mg/L.

COD & BOD analysis was also carried out during the study period and it was found

more than desirable value for drinking water.

MPN test was also carried out for this surface water sample and it was found positive.

It indicates towards the fecal contamination in surface water body.

3.11.9 Interpretation of Surface Water Quality Data

Based on test result data comparison study, it is interpreted that River water quality does not

meet with drinking water norms as per IS 10500:2012. Results of COD, BOD and Iron have

been found more than expected value which indicates that water has been contaminated

with organic matter and Iron. It may be due to directly or indirectly contamination of sewage

and effluent. These waters should not be directly used in drinking purpose but it can be used

in drinking after conventional treatment followed by disinfection. These waters can be used

in irrigation and other domestic purposes. Water qualities of pond waters are comparatively

better than river water.



3.11.10 Marine water

To assess the quality of Marine water, total 10 km radial distance was considered in up and

down stream of Arabian Sea. Benthos samples were collected with the help of Ekmann

Benthos sampler during high tide only. Frequency of sampling was once in a season except

monsoon season and samples were collected as per standard method for the examination of

water & wastewater APHA 23rd Edition, 2017 to analyze the physico chemical, metal,

biological & microbiological parameters. Sediment sample was also collected from Arabian

Sea for the analysis of nutrient and heavy metal parameter. Sampling location is showing in

the Map 3-8 and Table 3-23 Test results are presented in Table 3-24 to Table 3-29.

Table 3-23:Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations


project Site/Direction

Latitude and Longitude Source

M1 Arabian Sea (High Tide)

9.5 km/ NW

20°20‟54.05”N

72°46‟55.70”E Marine

M2 Arabian Sea (Low Tide) 20°20‟30.61”N

72°46‟39.94”E Marine

Map 3-8: Map showing the locations for Marine water

Table 3-24: Marine Water Analysis Result

S. No. Parameters Unit Low Tide High Tide

1. pH pH -unit 7.84 7.76

2. Temperature oC 25.0 24.0



3. Salinity as Nacl mg/L 35650 34510

4. TSS mg/L 526 476

5. Oil & Grease mg/L <1.0 <1.0

6. Total Nitrogen mg/L 1.5 1.3

8. Total Phosphorous mg/L 3.4 2.8

9. Phenolic Compound mg/L <0.1 <0.1

10. DO mg/L 5.1 5.4

11. BOD mg/L <4 <4

12. Iron mg/L 0.28 0.20

13. Copper mg/L <0.05 <0.05

14. Zinc mg/L 0.5 0.3

15. Boron mg/L <0.01 <0.01

16. Chromium mg/L <0.03 <0.03

Table 3-25:Microbiological Analysis Report for Marine Water Sample

S. No.

Sampling during

Total coliform

F. coliform E.Coli Streptococci

No./100ml

01. High Tide 104 84 3 <1.8

02. Low Tide 88 72 7 <1.8

Table 3-26: Zooplankton Analysis Report for Marine Water Sample

S. No. Sampling during Total Count

per m3

Percentage of Organism in each group

Protozoa Rotifera Copepoda

01. High Tide 6200 62 18 20

02. Low Tide 5800 70 14 16

Table 3-27:Pigment Analysis and Phytoplankton cell count for Marine Water

S.

No Sampling during

Chlorophyll – a

mg/m3

Pheophytin

mg/m3

Cell Count

Unit/L

01. High Tide 0.53 0.18 228

02. Low Tide 0.72 0.22 276

Table 3-28: Benthos Details

Systematic Group Results

Polychaetes +

Mysides _

Ostracodes -

Isopodes +

Amphipodes +

Brachyurans +

Insects +

Gastropodes -

Pelecypodes -

Copepode +

Fishlarvae +



Systematic Group Results

Fisheggs +

Note: + denotes present and – denotes absent

Dominant groups are Polychaetes, Fishlarvae fishes and Brachyurans.

Table 3-29: Sediment Quality Analysis

S. No.

Sampling Point

Total Phosphorous

mg/kg

Cr

mg/kg

Mn

mg/kg

Fe

mg/kg

Zn

mg/kg

Cu

mg/kg

Loss on ignition%

01. Arabian Sea 142 8.8 8.0 670 12.1 10.0 0.4

3.11.11 SUMMARY OF MARINE WATER QUALITY

Temperature is an important parameter, which affects the living organisms. The

temperature of the water was less than ambient air temperature.

The pH variation was observed in a narrow range of 7.56 to 7.62. pH range is

maintained due to buffering action of CO2,CO3-2 and HCO3

-2.

Salinity was observed in the range of 34520 to 35610 mg/L which is near to the

expected value.

DO is an essential parameter which affects the biotic component of the water. Fish

and other aquatic life take oxygen through the gill. DO levels affect the aerobic

bacterial population as well as Chlorophyllous Phytoplankton. During study period

maximum DO level was recorded in the range of 5.2 to 5.4 mg/L.

BOD is also an important parameter to define the environmental scenario of marine

ecosystem as it affects the DO level. BOD was found <4 mg/L.

Iron varies from 0.18 to 0.24 mg/L. Minimum value for Iron was recorded during high

tide. Other Heavy metals were found well within the range.

Microbiological and biological analysis was also carried out for marine water sample.

Results for microbiological parameters show that marine water is contaminated with

animal as well as human fecal matter.

3.11.12 INTERPRETATION OF MARINE WATER QUALITY DATA





3.12 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY

Mainly two types of Vegetation cover are on the earth surface. One is self-growing and

another is cultivated. Plants are renewable resource and useful to living organism in many

ways. It is therefore the role of man in manipulating and changing vegetation population.

Due to lack of awareness deforestation is occurring which in turn is responsible for

imbalance of ecosystem. The main objective of the ecological survey is aimed to find out

baseline status of flora and fauna of the study region. An ecological survey of the study area



was conducted particularly with reference to listing of species and assessment of the

existing baseline ecological (terrestrial and marine ecosystem) conditions in the study area.

3.12.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study of Flora and Fauna

The EB surveys have been conducted as per our QMS Quality Procedure for

Ecology and Biodiversity for conducting ecology and biodiversity study.

Study Area: 314.45 sq.km

Core Zone: Projects site and 5 km radii w.r.t. project site.

Buffer Zone: 10 km radii w.r.t. project site.

Study Period: 1st Oct 2018 to 31st Dec 2018

List of Villages: Punat, Sarigam, Sarai, Malav, Fansa, Pali Karambeli and chandor

3.12.2 Floral Diversity of the Study Area

The objective of this floral inventory of the study area is to provide necessary information on

floristic structure in the study area for formulating effective management and conservation

measures. The climatic, edaphic and biotic variations with their complex interrelationship and

composition of species, which are adapted to these variations, have resulted in different

vegetation cover, characteristic of each region (Ohasi, 1975).

Trees: The dominant trees in the study area are Manikara zapota (Chickoo) and Mangifera

indica (Aam). Total 32 species of trees belong to 15 families are enumerated from the study

area.

Table 3-30: Trees in the Study area

S. No. Family and Scientific Name Vernacular Name

1 Fabaceae

1/1 Acacia auriculiformis Bengali Baval

2/2 Acacia nilotica Desi Baval

3/3 Albizzia odoratissima Kalo Siras

4/4 Albizzia procera Killai (kelvo)

5/5 Butea monosperma Palas

6/6 Cassia fistula Bahwa garmalo

7/7 Dalbergia sissoo Sissoo

8/8 Pithecellobium dulce Mithi Amli (Goras Amli)

9/9 Millettia pinnata Karanj

10/10 Prosopis juliflora Gando Baval

11/11 Tamarindus indica Amli

2 Rutaceae

12/1 Aegle marmelos Bili

3 Simaroubaceae

13/1 Ailanthus excelesa Arduso

4 Cornaceae

14/1 Alangium salvifolium Ankol

5 Meliaceae

15/1 Azadirachta indica Limbado



Shrubs: Total 18 species of Shrubs belong to 12 families are enumerated from the study

area.

Table 3-31:List of Shrubs in the study area

S.No. Family name & Scientific Name Vernacular Name

1 Malvaceae

1/1 Abutilon indicum Khapat

2/2 Gossypium herbaceum Kapas

2 Rosaceae

3/1 Rosa Damascena Rose

3 Apocynaceae

4/1 Calotropis procera Akado

6 Leguminosae

16/1 Bauhinia purpurea Kachnar

7 Casuarinaceae

17/1 Casuarina equisetifolia Sharu

8 Boraginaceae

18/1 Cordia gharaf Gundi

9 Myrtaceae

19/1 Eucalyptus species Nilgiri

20/2 Syzygium cumunii Jambu

10 Moraceae

21/1 Ficus bengalensis Vad

22/2 Ficus glomerata Umero

23/3 Ficus religiosa Pipdo

24/4 Morus alba Shetur

11 Arecaceae

25/1 Phoenix sylvestris Khajuri

12 Combretaceae

26/1 Terminalia belleric Bahedo

27/2 Terminalia tomentosa Sadad

13 Rhamnaceae

28/1 Zizyphus mauritiana Bor

29/2 Zizyphus xylopyrus Ghat Bor

14 Sapotaceae

30/1 Manikara zapota Chickoo

15 Anacardiaceae

31/1 Mangifera indica Aam

32/2 Anacardium occidentale Kaju



S.No. Family name & Scientific Name Vernacular Name

5/2 Carissa conjesta Karmada

6/3 Nerium indicum Karen

4 Rutaceae

7/1 Cirtus species Limbu

5 Fabaceae

8/1 Prosopis juliflora Vilayati Mendi

9/2 Tephrosia purpurea Sartankho

6 Solanaceae

10/1 Datura stramonium Dhaturo

7 Mallows

11/1 Hibiscus rosa-sinensis Jasud

12/2 Thespesia lampas Paras Piplo

8 Verbenaceae

13/1 Lantana camara Lantana

9 Lythraceae

14/1 Lawsonia inermis Mendi

10 Oleaceae

15/1 Nyctanthus arbortristis Parijatak

11 Euphorbiaceae

16/1 Riccinus communis Divelo (Erandi)

12 Rhamnaceae

17/1 Zizyphus nummularia Chanibor

18/1 Zizyphus oenoplia Boydinovelo

Herbs: Total 14 species of Herbs belong to 11 families are enumerated from the study area

Table 3-32:List of Herbs in the study area

S. No. Family name & Scientific Name Vernacular Name

1 Papaveraceae

1/1 Argemone mexicana Darudi

2 Amaranthaceae

2/1 Aerva sanguinolenta Karadia

3/2 Achyranthes aspera Anghedi

3 Fabaceae

4/1 Arachis hypogea Mungfali F

5/2 Cassia tora Kunvandio

4 Apocynaceae

6/1 Catharanthus roseus Barmasi

5 Solanaceae

7/1 Capsicum annum Marchi

8/2 Datura metel Ganthovalo Dhaturo

6 Apiaceae

9/1 Centella asiatica Bhrami

7 Malvaceae

10/1 Hibiscus lobatus Tali

8 Convolvulaceae

11/1 Ipomoea aquaticaforsk Mali Ni Bhaji



S. No. Family name & Scientific Name Vernacular Name

9 Musaceae

12/1 Musa paradisiacal Kela

10 Lamiaceae

13/1 Ocimum sanctum Tulsi

11 Phyllanthaceae

14/1 Phyllanthus fraternus Bhonya Amli

Climbers: Total 4 species of Herbs belong to 4 families are enumerated from the study

area.

Table 3-33: List of Climbers in the study area

S.No. Family Name & Scientific Name Vernacular Name

1 Vitaceae

1/1 Ampelocissus latfolia Jungli

2 Nyctaginaceae

2/1 Bougainvillea spectabilis Bougain velia

3 Cucurbitaceae

3/1 Cucurbita maxima Kolu

4 Menispermaceae

4/1 Tinosporacordifolia Gulvel

Fauna:

There was no endangered species observed during faunal survey, list of fauna detail

summarized in Table 3-34 to Table 3-39.

Table 3-34: List of Mammals in the Study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common

Name Local Name

Schedule as per WPA 1972

1. Herpestes edwardsi Nurulia, Noria

Common mongoose Schedule II

2. Funambulus penanti Khiskoli Three striped Schedule IV

3. Rattus rattus Rat - Schedule V

4. Mus musculus Mouse - Schedule V

5. Chiroptera Bat - Schedule V

Table 3-35:List of Domestic animal in the Study area

S.No. Scientific Name Common Name

1. Bubalus bubalis Buffalo

2. Bos taurus Cow

3. Capra aegagrushircus Goat

4. Canis lupus familiaris Dog

Table 3-36: List of Birds in the Study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name Local Name Schedule

and Status Mig.

Status

1. Ardeola grayii Indian pond heron - Schedule IV R

2. Bubulcus ibis Cattle egret Dhorbaglo Schedule IV R

3. Egretta garzetta Little egret Baglo Schedule IV R



4. Pseudibis papillosa Black ibis - Schedule IV R

5. Milvus migrans Black winged kite Govinda Samadi LC R

6. Pavo cristatus Indian Peafowl Mor Schedule I R

7. Vanellus indicus Red-watted lapwing Titodi Schedule IV R

8. Charadrius dubius Yellow-wattled lapwing - LC R

9. Tringa ochropus Little ringed plover Leelitutvari LC R

10. Himantopus himantopus Green sandpiper - LC R

11. Sterna aurantia Indian river tern - LC R

12. Columba livia Blue rock pigeon Parevun Schedule IV R

13. Streptopelia decaocto Indian ring dove Dhol LC R

14. Streptopelia chinensis Spotted dove Vanaholi LC R

15. Psittacula krameri Rose ringed parakeet Sudo, Popat LC R

16. Cuculus micropterus Indian cuckoo - Schedule IV R

17. Glaucidium radiatum Jungle owlet Ghubad Schedule I R

18. Alcedo atthis Common kingfisher Lagothi Schedule IV R

19. Merops orientalis Green bee-eater Nano patrangiyo - R

20. Coracias benghalensis Indian roller Nilkant Schedule IV R

21. Galerida malabarica Malabar crested lark - LC R

22. Hirundo rustica Common swallow - LC R

23. Hirundo daurica Red rumped swallow Kenchia babil LC R

24. Oriolus xanthornus Black headed oriole - Schedule IV R

25. Dicrurus adsimilis Fork Tailed Drongo Kalokoshi Schedule IV R

26. Sturnus pagodarum Brahminy myna - Schedule IV R

27. Acridotheres tristis Indian myna Kabar Schedule IV R

28. Acridotheres ginginianus Bank myna Kabar Schedule IV R

29. Pycnonotus cafer Red vented bulbul Bulbul Schedule IV R

30. Turdoides caudata Common babbler Sheradi Schedule IV R

31. Turdoides striata Jungle babbler Vanalaledo Schedule IV R

32. Orthotomus Tailor bird Darjido LC R

33. Megalurus palustris Striated marsh warbler - LC R

34. Copsychus saularis Magpie robin Daiyad LC R

35. Saxicoloides fulicata Indian robin Deoli LC R

36. Geokichla citrina Orange headed ground

thrush Malagirkasturo LC R

37. Parus spilonotus Yellow cheeked tit - Schedule IV R

38. Motacilla flava Yellow wagtail Matanopilakya LC R

39. Cinnyris asiaticus Purple sunbird Phulchakli LC R

40. Passer domesticus House sparrow Chakli LC R

41. Ploceus philippinus Baya Sughari Schedule IV R

Table 3-37: List of Reptiles in the Study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name Local Name

Schedule as per WPA,1972

1. Hemidactylus flaviviridis Northern house gecko Garoli Not Listed

2. Calotes versicolor Common garden lizard Kachindo Not Listed

3. Calotes rouxi Forest calotes Kachindo Not Listed



4. Sitana ponticeriana Fan-throated lizard - Not Listed

5. Chameleo zeylanicus Indian chameleon Sarado Not Listed

6. Ptyas mucosus Common rat snake Dhaman Not Listed

7. Naja naja Indian cobra Nag Schedule II

Table 3-38: List of Invertebrates in the Study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name Local Name

1. Anisoptera Dragonfly Dragonfly

2. Apis Honey bee Honey bee

3. Argiopeaurantia Garden Spinder The garden

Table 3-39:Details of Fishes

S. No. Species S. No. Species

Marine Fishes

1. White Pomfret 9. Mullet

2. BlachPomfret 10. Ribbon Fish

3. Bombay Duck 11. Silverbar

4. Thread Fin 12. Eel

5. Jew Fish 13. Smallscineldies

6. Clupeids 14. Cat Fish

7. Coilia 15. Crab

8. Levta 16. Leather Jacket

Fresh water Fishes

1. Catla 5. Mullet

2. Mrigal 6. Eel

3. Minor Carp 7. Shrimps

4. Vallagoattu

Source: Local Information from Villagers

3.12.3 Interpretation of Ecology and Biodiversity








3.13 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

Socioeconomics (also known as socio-economics or social-economics) is the social

science that studies how economic activity affects social processes. In general it analyzes

how societies progress, stagnate, or regress because of their local or regional economy, or

the global economy.



In order to assess and evaluate the likely impacts arising out of any new or existing projects

in socio-economic environment, it is necessary to gauge the apprehension of the people in

the surrounding areas. Socio-economic survey serves as an effective tool for fulfilling this

requirement.

The rapid industrialization of the study region has greatly influenced the socio economic and

health environment in the villages. Increasing industrialization and population density has

increased pressure on resources, civic amenities and public infrastructure. Economic

conditions of the local people have improved with the increasing industrialization and greater

employment opportunities.

The socio-economic environment includes demography structure, population density, literacy

level, and employment levels. The data establish a baseline for the prediction of likely

impacts of the proposed activity on the socio-economic environment. Secondary information

pertaining to the study area villages was collected from Government Agencies, Census data

for the year 2011, and statistical abstracts to compile the socio-economic data.

3.13.1 Socio-Economic Survey Methodology

Socio-economic survey tools provide a means of improving understanding of local resource

management systems, resource use and the relative importance of resources for

households and villages. They can also be used to elicit insights on interaction with

government decision-making systems, community perceptions of trends and priority issues,

and community-based institutions and their role in the sustainable use and conservation of

natural resources.

Data Collection: Following steps were considered for the collection of primary data:

1. Identification of Study Area: The study area was identified before carrying out the

survey. All the related information which could affect the prosperity, development & literacy

were also collected.

2. Site Visit: Location wise survey plan & format for data collection were prepared for site

visit. Data regarding Land Characteristics, Population, Literacy, Workers and Amenities were

collected during the survey.

Analysis of Data: The data collected by primary survey were verified with secondary data

collected from sources like Government Agencies, Census data for the year 2011, and

statistical abstracts.

3.13.2 Demography

Almost all villages in the study area are experiencing a rapid growth of population due to

industrialization. The total population of study region is summarized in Table 3-40.

3.13.3 Population Density

Population density in the study area varies from 71–6156 person/sq.km. Details of the same

are tabulated in Table 3-40.

Table 3-40: Details of Population in Study Area



Villages No. of

Household

Total

Population

T006Ftal area

Sq.km

Population density

Person/sq.km

Fansa 2963 14459 15.63 925

Pali karambeli 475 2356 4.26 553

Pali 451 2241 5.84 384

Jamburi 392 1868 2.65 705

Mohan 1334 6225 9.34 666

Eklahare 345 1696 2.33 728

Nahuli 352 1644 3.16 520

Valwada 876 3922 6.03 650

Chanod (CT) 4738 18776 3.05 6156

Sarigam (INA) 290 925 13.12 71

Bhilad (CT) 1998 9022 7.47 1208

Daheli 2188 10475 9.61 1090

Dhanoli 544 2826 3.83 738

Talwada 229 1223 2.02 605

Zaroli 1093 5469 9.37 584

Nag was 333 1743 3.36 519

Manda 1165 6022 10.64 566

Sarai 429 2391 3.02 792

Maroli 3081 15678 18.70 838

Nanakwada (CT) 2407 10172 2.85 3569

Malav 535 2788 5.68 491

Vankas 462 2472 4.74 522

Manekpur 589 2919 4.64 629

Ahu 301 1490 3.19 467



Villages No. of

Household

Total

Population

T006Ftal area

Sq.km

Population density

Person/sq.km

Khattalwada 4048 21036 34.55 609

Tadgam 513 2514 4.60 546

Kachigam 755 3375 5.96 566

Kalgam 2182 10687 21.48 497

Punat 530 2621 5.78 453

Aangam 528 2477 4.02 616

Manda 1165 6022 10.64 566

Nandigam 372 1971 3.39 581

Achhari 404 2047 - -

Mamakwada 328 1515 23.3 65

Karambele 688 3308 54.2 61

Karamkhal 831 3525 38.0 93

Pardi (M) 6278 28495 13.1 2175

Chandor 538 2389 40.5 59

Namdha 456 1938 21.1 92

Total 47,186 2,22,722 435.12 30,955

3.13.4 Sex Ratio

The sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000 males is in range of 629-1080 with lowest

in Sarigam and highest in Punat. The Sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000 males

indirectly reveals certain sociological aspect in relation to female births, infant mortality

among female children. Details of the same are tabulated in

Table 3-41.

Table 3-41: Details of Sex Ratio in Study Area

Zone of Study Male

Population Female

Population Total

Population

Sex Ratio

(Female to 1000 Male)

Fansa 7324 7135 14459 974



Zone of Study Male

Population Female

Population Total

Population

Sex Ratio

(Female to 1000 Male)

Pali karambeli 1223 1133 2356 926

Pali 1130 1111 2241 983

Jamburi 936 932 1868 996

Mohan 3160 3065 6225 970

Eklahare 890 806 1696 906

Nahuli 838 806 1644 962

Valwada 2041 1881 3922 922

Chanod (CT) 10800 7976 2819 739

Sarigam (CT) 568 357 925 629

Bhilad (CT) 4803 4219 9022 878

Daheli 5398 5077 10475 941

Dhanoli 1424 1402 2826 985

Talwada 605 618 1223 1021

Zaroli 2744 2725 5469 993

Nagwas 869 874 1743 1006

Manda 3001 3021 6022 1007

Sarai 1220 1171 2391 960

Maroli 8029 7649 15678 953

Nanakwada (CT) 5140 5032 10172 979

Malav 1402 1386 2788 989

Vankas 1271 1201 2472 945

Manekpur 1465 1454 2919 992

Ahu 750 740 1490 987

Khattalwada 10538 10498 21036 996

Tadgam 1307 1207 2514 923

Kachigam 1799 1576 3375 876

Kalgam 5335 5352 10687 1003

Punat 1212 1309 2621 1080

Aangam 1254 1223 2477 975

Manda 3001 3021 6022 1006

Nandigam 960 1011 1971 1053

Achhari 1064 983 2047 923

Mamakwada 784 731 1515 932

Karambele 1702 1606 3308 943

Karamkhal 2093 1432 3525 684

Pardi (M) 14648 13847 28495 945

Chandor 1215 1174 2389 966

Namdha 1036 902 1938 871

Total 1,14,979 1,07,643 2,06,765 -



3.13.5 Literacy Rate

The literacy level of the study area is summarized in Table 3-42 and graphically presented in

Figure 3-6.

Table 3-42: Details of Literacy Rate in Study Area

Village Literate Literacy (%)

Male Female Total Male Female Total

Fansa 5830 5169 10999 79.60 72.45 76.07

Pali karambeli 994 938 1932 81.28 82.79 82.00

Pali 830 637 1467 73.45 57.34 65.46

Jamburi 709 607 1316 75.75 65.13 70.45

Mohan 2554 2202 4756 80.82 71.84 76.40

Eklahare 767 625 1392 86.18 77.54 82.08

Nahuli 667 558 1225 79.59 69.23 74.51

Valwada 1614 1305 2919 79.08 69.38 74.43

Chanod (CT) 8820 5845 14665 81.67 73.28 78.11

Sarigam (CT) 461 243 704 81.16 68.07 76.11

Bhilad (CT) 3713 2681 6394 77.31 63.55 70.87

Daheli 3838 3063 6901 71.10 60.33 65.88

Dhanoli 940 717 1657 66.01 51.14 58.63

Talwada 398 268 666 65.79 43.37 54.46

Zaroli 1974 1489 3463 71.94 54.64 63.32

Nagwas 640 444 1084 73.65 50.80 62.19

Manda 1998 1507 3505 66.58 49.88 58.20

Sarai 873 599 1472 71.56 51.15 61.56

Maroli 6293 5085 11378 78.38 66.48 72.57

Nanakwada (CT) 4536 4312 8848 88.25 85.69 86.98

Malav 928 645 1573 66.19 46.54 56.42

Vankas 976 669 1645 76.79 55.70 66.55

Manekpur 915 663 1578 62.46 45.60 54.06

Ahu 523 429 952 69.73 57.97 63.89

Khattalwada 7531 5805 13336 71.47 55.30 63.40

Tadgam 1069 853 1922 81.79 70.67 76.45

Kachigam 1459 1025 2484 81.10 65.04 73.60

Kalgam 4310 3824 8134 80.79 71.45 76.11

Punat 1040 841 1881 85.81 64.25 71.77

Aangam 839 639 1478 66.91 52.25 59.67

Manda 1998 1507 3505 66.58 49.88 58.20

Nandigam 617 479 1096 64.27 47.38 55.61

Achhari 813 608 1421 76.41 61.85 69.42

Mamakwada 627 470 1097 79.97 64.30 72.41

Karambele 1462 1297 2759 85.90 80.76 83.40

Karamkhal 1740 929 2669 83.13 64.87 75.72



Village Literate Literacy (%)

Male Female Total Male Female Total

Pardi (M) 12016 10447 22463 82.03 75.45 78.83

Chandor 945 790 1735 77.78 67.29 72.62

Namdha 879 616 1495 84.85 68.29 77.14

Total 89,136 70,830 1,48,967 - - -



Figure 3-6:Graph of Literacy Rate

Among all the villages of study area Nanakwada (CT) having high literacy rate i.e. 86.98 %. There is not much difference between female literacy

rate and male literacy rate in the study region. Female literacy rate is an important indicator for social change.

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

% L

iter

acy

Villages

Literacy (%) Male Literacy (%) Female Literacy (%) Total



3.13.6 Economic Aspects

Economic aspects of the study area include the economical structure of the people of the

surrounding area. It can be predicted that economic structure of the study area will be

improved with time, because it consists large industrial estate and hence there are more

employment opportunities.

According to working status, whole population of the study area is divided into

Marginal workers

Non workers

Main workers

Census department has defined 10 categories of workers in Main workers. It consists of

cultivators, agricultural, labourer those engaged in livestock, forestry, fishing, mining and

quarrying, manufacturing, processing and repairs in household industries and other services.

Workers engaged in the work for a period less than 6 month during the reference year falls

under marginal workers. Workers engaged in unpaid household duties e.g. students, retired

person, dependents etc. falls under non-workers. Detail of occupational structure is shown in

Table 3-43 and Figure 3-7.

Table 3-43:Details of Occupational Structure

Zone of Study Non-Workers (%) Total Workers

Main Workers (%) Marginal Workers (%)

Fansa 57.8 33.18 9.0

Pali karambeli 42.1 57.05 0.8

Pali 62.0 36.59 1.4

Jamburi 59.9 34.37 5.7

Mohan 51.0 39.57 9.5

Eklahare 56.0 36.20 7.8

Nahuli 59.9 38.93 1.2

Valwada 55.8 39.29 4.9

Chanod (CT) 60.7 37.03 2.3

Sarigam (CT) 53.3 45.62 1.1

Bhilad (CT) 63.8 33.15 3.0

Daheli 64.6 33.88 1.5

Dhanoli 65.7 29.02 5.2

Talwada 58.2 35.24 6.5

Zaroli 62.9 32.89 4.2

Nagwas 47.3 27.60 25.1

Manda 58.2 37.70 4.1

Sarai 58.2 34.38 7.4

Maroli 64.3 33.08 2.6

Nanakwada (CT) 60.5 35.68 3.9

Malav 53.7 38.31 8.0

Vankas 49.3 43.28 7.4

Manekpur 67.6 29.19 3.2



Zone of Study Non-Workers (%) Total Workers

Main Workers (%) Marginal Workers (%)

Ahu 51.4 46.71 1.9

Khattalwada 63.2 32.72 4.0

Tadgam 51.8 31.62 16.6

Kachigam 12.5 42.46 13.7

Kalgam 58.2 36.21 5.6

Punat 59.1 37.01 3.9

Aangam 53.7 38.88 7.4

Manda 58.2 37.70 4.1

Nandigam 58.4 29.78 11.8

Achhari 61.7 35.86 2.5

Mamakwada 56.9 38.88 4.2

Karambele 66.1 32.95 0.9

Karamkhal 50.4 43.15 6.4

Pardi (M) 57.4 35.20 7.4

Chandor 59.3 37.17 3.6

Namdha 53.0 38.08 8.9



Figure 3-7: Details of Occupational Structure

Pali Karambeli has significant employment i.e. 57.05 % as main workers, while the lowest employment as main workers in Nagwas i.e. 27.6%.

Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers. Rapid industrialization in the last two decades has resulted in significant

changes in the occupational profile of the local people. There is an overall trend among the youth to opt for employment in service sector and move

away from traditional occupation.

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80%

of

Work

ers

Villages

Non Workers (%) Total Workers Main Workers(%) Total Workers Marginal Workers (%)



3.13.7 Amenities

Village-wise status of infrastructural facilities available in the study area with respect to

education, medical facility, water supply, communication and transportation facility and

power supply, banking facilities etc. are presented in analysis of data indicates that

infrastructural facilities/ basis amenities are available in most of the villages.

Table 3-44:Education Facilities

Go

vt.

P

re -

Pri

mary

Sch

oo

l

Pri

vate

Pre

-

Pri

mary

Sch

oo

l

Go

vt.

Pri

mary

Sch

oo

l

Pri

vate

Pri

mary

Sch

oo

l

Go

vt

Mid

dle

Sch

oo

l

Pri

vate

Mid

dle

Sch

oo

l

Go

vt

Seco

nd

ary

Sch

oo

l

Pri

vate

Seco

nd

ary

Sch

oo

l

Go

vt.

Sen

ior

Seco

nd

ary

Sch

oo

l

Pri

vate

Sen

ior

Seco

nd

ary

Sch

oo

l

Go

vt.

Po

lyte

ch

nic

Go

vt.

Vo

cati

on

al

Tra

inin

g

Sch

oo

l

16 1 81 8 5 1 13 2 7 5 1 1

Table 3-45: Health Care Facilities

Primary Health Centre Primary Health Sub Center

Maternity And Child Welfare Centre

Mobile Health Clinic

6 33 7 1

Table 3-46:Drinking Water Facilities

Tap Water-Treated

Tap Water

Untreated

Covered Well

Uncovered Well

Hand Pum

p

Tube Wells/Borehol

e River/Canal Tank/Pond/Lake

1 28 5 26

29

18 22 13

Table 3-47: Sanitation Facilities

Closed Drainage

Open Drainage

No Drainage Open Pucca Drainage Covered with Tiles Slab

Open Pucca Drainage

Uncovered

Open Kuccha Drainage

1 25 8 8 23 17

Table 3-48:Communication Facilities

Post Office Sub Post

Office Telephone (landlines)

Public Call Office /Mobile

Internet Cafes / Common

service Centre

3 23 29 22 29

Table 3-49:Transportation Facilities

Public Bus

Service

Private Bus

Service

Railway Station

Auto/Modified Autos

Taxi Vans Tractors Sea/River/Ferr

y Service

29 4 4 17 0 4 19 1



Table 3-50: Road Facilities

Black Topped (pucca) Road

Gravel (kuchha) Roads

Water Bounded Macadam

All Weather Road

Foothpath

29 26 5 21 29

Table 3-51: Bank Facilities

Commercial Bank Cooperative Bank Agricultural Credit Societies

5 1 6

Table 3-52: Power Supply Facilities

Power Supply For Domestic Use

Power Supply For Agriculture Use

Power Supply For Commercial Use

Power Supply For All Users

29 29 29 29

Source: District Census Handbook 2011, District Valsad, Gujarat and Daman & Diu.

3.13.8 Interpretation of Socio Economic Data

During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available in all

villages within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 54.06 to 86.98%. On

the basis of survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote

educate more and more people. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-

workers. It indicates that the problem of unemployment can be solved by providing proper

training and education. There is also need to establish more industries so that maximum

number of employment can be generated. Basic amenities like Education facilities Health

care facilities, water supply, electric power supply, mode of transportation etc. are available

in all villages.

Socio Gap Analysis

During the survey and interaction with villagers, following issues were identified.

Issues Village name

Insufficient furniture in primary school Sarigam Village

Not proper school uniform Punat Village

insufficient availability of Drinking water

Not proper sanitary facility Sarai Village

Awareness program to farmers

Improper Community plantation Chandor Village

Health issues in villagers



Insufficient knowledge for farming Malav Village

Depends upon above issues company will proposes to carry out social welfare activities for

the welfare of local community is provide in section 6.2.1.

3.14 SUMMARY

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Sr. No.

Criteria Pollutants

Unit Maximum Value

Minimum Value

98th

percentile

value

Prescribed standard

1. PM10 µg/m3 86.1 61.9 85.7 100

2. PM2.5 µg/m3 47.1 32.0 46.3 60

3. SO2 µg/m3 17.6 9.4 17.5 80

4. NOX µg/m3 23.0 16.2 23.0 80

Based on comparison study of results with NAAQS for tested parameters, ambient air quality of studied locations can be considered good as all the results of tested parameters are well within the limit. Looking towards the increasing pattern of PM10 and PM2.5 concentration in ambient air, it is

suggested that proper air pollution control measures must be adopted by the industry. This interpretation relate to the results found during the monitoring for particular location and date of

monitoring.

Noise Monitoring

Sr. No.

Parameter Unit Maximum Value Minimum Value Prescribed standard

1. Leq (Day) dB(A) 77.1 50.2 -

2. Leq(Night) dB(A) 73.5 42.1 -

Based on noise level data obtained during the survey for residential area and industrial area, it is interpreted that noise levels are within the standard norms prescribed by MoEF & CC. Looking

towards the increase in noise generating sources it is suggested that there is need to apply noise

reducing devices at noise generating sources and generate public awareness.

Soil Quality and Characteristics

Sr. No.

Parameter Unit Maximum Value Minimum Value

1. pH - 7.82 7.56

2. electrical

Conductivity dS/m 1.18 0.86

3. Sodium meq/100gm 6.6 4.5

4. Potassium meq/100gm 2.0 1.2

5. Phosphorous mg/100gm 19.0 9.8

6. Total Nitrogen % 0.056 0.030

Based on soil analysis data it is concluded that soils are normal to saline from salinity view point and non-sodic as ESP is < 15 at the site. The soils are low to medium in nitrogen, low in phosphorus and

high in potassium. The levels of total Fe, Cu, Cr, B and Zn are within the safe limits. However, for successful greenbelt development liberal quantity of organic manure (50 tons/ha) and double the

quantity of recommended doses of N, and P and half the dose of K fertilizers should be applied. The soil at the project site requires amelioration. Apply acid forming amendments like sulphur/iron pyrite for removal of excess sodium from the exchange complex with provision of adequate drainage. The

soil should be periodically monitored for EC, pH and ESP.

Ground Water

Sr. No.

Parameter Unit Maximum Value

Minimum Value

Desirable Limit

Permissible Limit

1. pH - 7.28 7.14 6.5-8.5 No Relaxation



2. TDS mg/L 924 602 500 2000

3. TSS mg/L <2 <2 - -

4. Total hardness mg/L 584 384 200 600

5. Chloride mg/L 202 148 250 1000

6. Total Alkalinity mg/L 502 292 200 600

7. Fluoride mg/L 0.6 0.4 1.0 1.5

8. Iron mg/L 0.28 0.14 0.3 No Relaxation

On the basis of test results obtained it is interpreted that results of all village meet with the drinking water standard IS 10500:2012. These water sources can be used in drinking as well as all domestic

purposes. To save the ground water from contamination and improving the quality, rainwater harvesting and ground water recharging may be helpful.

Surface Water

Sr. No.

Parameter Unit Maximum Value

Minimum Value

Desirable Limit

Permissible Limit

1. ph - 8.02 7.96 6.5-8.5 No Relaxation

2. TDS mg/L 354 186 500 2000

3. DO mg/L 4.9 4.7 - -

4. COD mg/L 20 10 - -

5. BOD mg/L 6 4 - -

Based on test result data comparison study, it is interpreted that River water quality does not meet with drinking water norms as per IS 10500:2012. Results of COD, BOD and Iron have been found

more than expected value which indicates that water has been contaminated with organic matter and Iron. It may be due to directly or indirectly contamination of sewage and effluent. These waters should

not be directly used in drinking purpose but it can be used in drinking after conventional treatment followed by disinfection. These waters can be used in irrigation and other domestic purposes. Water

qualities of pond waters are comparatively better than river water.

Marine Water

On the basis of test results it is interpreted that water quality of marine is as per expectation and suitable for sustaining the aquatic life. Presence of certain bio indicators indicate that water is being contaminated with sewage or industrial discharge. Organic load is not more than the self-purification

capacity.


Different species of flora were observed among which Mango and Chickoo species were dominant, as the soil of the study region also support for the cultivation of same. Herbal species were observed

rarely. Looking to the density of plant it may also be suggested to improve the quality of environment by planting more trees. Due to destruction of natural habitat, less numbers of wild mammals were

observed. Number of species and density of wild mammals can be increased by promoting/ facilitating the growth of bush. There was no endangered species observed during primary survey.

Socio Economic

During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available in all villages within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 54.06 to 86.98%. On the basis of survey

for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote educate more and more people. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers. It indicates that the problem of

unemployment can be solved by providing proper training and education. There is also need to establish more industries so that maximum number of employment can be generated. Basic

amenities like Education facilities Health care facilities, water supply, electric power supply, mode of transportation etc. are available in all villages.



4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND

MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 INVESTIGATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DUE TO THE

PROPOSED PROJECT

This chapter comprises the information regarding the identified beneficially or adversely

environmental impacts due to possible aspects predicted because of location of the plant,

expected / predicted accidents scenario, conceptualization of project, preconstruction &

construction activities and due to operation of machineries/equipment. Environmental

aspect-impact relationship will be identified and quantified with its scale of magnitude and

scale of importance, accordingly significance of impact will be determined along with

mitigation measures.

The impact assessment essentially consists of three steps:

1. Impact Identification

2. Impact Predictions

3. Impact Analysis for determination of significance of impacts

Here, impact assessment has been done based on Leopold Matrix in which each action and

its potential in creating impact is expressed in terms of its magnitude and importance. For

quantitative representation, both magnitude & importance are represented by values as

described below:

Scale of Importance: Importance of an interaction is related to its significance, or an

assessment of probable consequences of anticipated impact. It ranges from 1 to 9; with 9

representing a very important interaction and 1 of relatively low.

Scale of Magnitude: Impact score or magnitude ranges from 0-5 with positive and negative

values, depending upon the impact rising out of the project activity. Refer Table 4-1 for

Severity Criteria for Magnitude of Impacts.

Table 4-1: Severity Criteria for Magnitude of Impacts

S. No Category Description of category Impact

Adverse Beneficial

1. No impact - 0 0

2. No appreciable impact Short term reversible -1 1

3. Significant impact Long term reversible -2 2

4. Major impact Irreversible but of lesser extent -3 3

5. High impact Irreversible but of medium extent -4 4

6. Permanent impact Severe irreversible impact -5 5



Score of each of the component is to be multiplied by „‟Importance factor” and totals core is

to be obtained by summation of products. Score ranges of impact evaluation based on

matrix score is given in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2: Score ranges for Beneficial and Adverse Impacts

S. No Total score Outcome

1. +ve / -ve Beneficial impact / adverse impact

2. 0-300 No appreciable Beneficial impact / adverse impact

3. 300-600 Appreciable but reversible adverse impact-mitigation measures are needed

4. 600-900 Significant adverse impacts: most of the impacts are reversible. Mitigation measure are crucial.

5. 900-1200 Major adverse impacts; most of the impacts are reversible. Alternative site selection to be considered.

6. >1200 Permanent irreversible impact; alternatives to the project need to be explored

4.1.1 Investigated Environmental Impacts Due to the Proposed Project

Assessment of Significance of Impacts

Assessment of aspect and impact from the proposed activity is described in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3: Aspect-Impact Identification from Proposed Project



S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude

(+ve) or Air Water

Waste Water

Land Resource Depletion

SHW Ecology &

Biodiversity Social

Health &

Safety Total

(-ve) AP/AQ NV SW GW Effluent/ Sewage

LU/ LC

Soil RD HW C&D SW Ter. Aqu. Infrastructures Economic /

Employment

Scale of Importance 7 5 4 4 5 1 3 8 8 4 4 2 3 6 9 6 79

1 Project Pre- Construction/ Construction

1.1 Site clearance N Removal of top soil & Land clearence

1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1

1.2 Excavation and paving

of site

N Generation of debris 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1

N Dust generation 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1 -1

AN Fall in pit, land sliding

from sidewalls 1,2,3,4,5 -2 -2

1.3

Fabrication work for erecting major plant equipment including


mixtures, vibrators etc. and preventive

maintenance work

N Generation of scraps 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1

N Noise generation 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1

1.4

Vehicular movement for transportation of construction material

and waste

N Increase in traffic

load 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1 -2

N Emission of HC & CO 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1 -2

N Noise generation 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1 -2

1.5 Influx of workers

during construction phase

N Employment generation

1,2,3,4,5 2 2

N Sewage generation 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1

2 Commissioning/ Project Operation

2.1 Reactions Processes

N Emission of P2O5 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -2 -3 -8

N Waste Water Generation

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -6

N genration of

Phosphine gas reacts with Acid & water

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -6

N Spillage and Leakage

of Raw Material/ Prduct

1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1 -1 -3

2.2 Export of Product N Increase in market

scenario 1,2,3,4,5 5 5

3 General & Utilities

3.1 Operation of D.G Set, Cooling tower, Boiler,

etc.

AN Emission of PM, SO2 and NOx from D.G &

Boiler 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3

N Generation of waste water from Cooling

and Boiler Blow

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -6



S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude

(+ve) or Air Water

Waste Water

Land Resource Depletion

SHW Ecology &

Biodiversity Social

Health &

Safety Total

(-ve) AP/AQ NV SW GW Effluent/ Sewage

LU/ LC

Soil RD HW C&D SW Ter. Aqu. Infrastructures Economic /

Employment

Down

N Noise generation

from D.G Set 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1

3.2 Equipment and Floor

Washing N

Generation of waste water

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3

3.3 Operation of ETP

N Generation of waste

water 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -6

N Generation of ETP

waste 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3


operational phase

N Employment Generation

1,2,3,4,5 5 5

N Sewage generation 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -6

3.5 Green belt

developement N

Reduce air pollution, Noise

1,2,3,4,5 5 5 10

3.6 Socio Economic

improvement N CER Activity 1,2,3,4,5 5 5

3.7

Loading and Unloading of

chemicals, products etc.

N Generation of Waste Drums/Barrels/bags

and containers 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3

3.8


raw materials, finished goods and Industrial

Waste

N Increase in traffic

load 1,2,3,4,5

-3 -3

N Emission of HC & CO 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -2 -3 -8

N Noise generation 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3

3.9 Raw water intake for Plant Operation and

Domestic Uses N

Consumption of water

1,2,3,4,5 -4 -4 -8

3.10 Storm water management

AN Mixing of process

drains with rainwater 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -2 -2 -3 -10

3.11 Equipment

maintenance

N Generation of used oil and lubricants

1,2,3,4,5 -2 -2

N Generation of scraps and used spares etc.

1,2,3,4,5 -1 -1

Total of Individual VEC's -9 -1 -19 -2 -16 0 -2 -4 -9 -3 0 -6 -3 -4 17 -15 -76

TOTAL -63 -5 -76 -8 -80 0 -6 -32 -72 -12 0 -12 -9 -24 153 -90 -336

Interpretation:

The final score is -336 which concludes “Appreciable but reversible adverse impact-mitigation measures are needed”. Mitigation measures for respective valued environment component are described in following sections.



Signifecance:

The mitigation measures are suggested based on the criteria of significance / consequence

as per the Table 4-4 for individual Valued Environmental Components (VECs) in following

sections.

Table 4-4: Criteria of Significance / Consequence

Score Significance/Consequence

-/+ 1 to -/+ 9 Low

-/+ 10 to -/+ 30 Medium

-/+ 31 to -/+ 45 High

4.1.2 Air Environment

Construction Phase

Impact

During the construction phase of the project, the major activities will involve earth work

excavation, transport of construction materials, building of structures etc. These activities

would cause a general increase in levels of dust and suspended particulate matter in the

ambient air. During construction phase, for equipment/ material movement trucks and trailers

shall be deployed from manufacturer‟s locations. Due to the movement of vehicles for

transportation of construction material required during construction phase, marginal increase

in the levels of particulate matter (PM), carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons (HC) are

envisaged. However, this increase in concentration of pollutants would be of temporary in

nature and localized.

Mitigation Measures

Mitigation measures for air quality impacts are:

All vehicles delivering construction materials to the site shall be covered to avoid

spillage of materials and maintain cleanliness of the roads;

Regular water sprinkling will be done at least twice a day (i.e. morning and evening)

for dust suppression of the construction site and unpaved roads used by construction

vehicles;

Dust screens will be used and water will be sprinkled around the construction site to

arrest spreading of dust in the air and surrounding areas;

The engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipment used will be

maintained as such, that exhaust emissions are low and do not reach statutory limits

set for the concerned vehicle/equipment type;

Ensuring the availability of valid Pollution Under Control Certificates (PUCC) for all

vehicles used on site.

Operational Phase

Impacts on ambient air, during operation phase, would be;



1. Flue gases emission due to operation of boiler using natural gas as fuel & use of DG

set of 100 KVA capacity using HSD as fuel.

2. Emission of P2O5 from the reactor.

The purpose of impact predictions on air environment, emission sources can be classified as

point source. Emissions from the above mentioned point sources will be predicted for its

impacts on the Ground Level Concentration (GLC) at various distances using the dispersion

modeling guidelines given by the Central Pollution Control Board, New Delhi and i.e. by

using AERMOD view software.

About the Software

The American Meteorological Society/Environmental Protection Agency Regulatory Model

Improvement Committee (AERMIC) was formed to introduce state-of-the-art modeling

concepts into the EPA's air quality models. Through AERMIC, a modeling system,

AERMOD, was introduced that incorporated air dispersion based on planetary boundary

layer turbulence structure and scaling concepts, including treatment of both surface and

elevated sources, and both simple and complex terrain.

AMS/EPA Regulatory Model (AERMOD) is a steady-state plume model. It is designed to

apply to source releases and meteorological conditions that can be assumed to be steady

over individual modeling periods (typically one hour or less). AERMOD has been designed to

handle the computation of pollutant impacts in both flat and complex terrain within the same

modeling framework. In fact, with the AERMOD structure, there is no need for the

specification of terrain type (flat, simple, or complex) relative to stack height since receptors

at all elevations are handled with the same general methodology. To define the form of the

AERMOD concentration equations, it is necessary to simultaneously discuss the handling of

terrain.

AERMET is an input data processor that is one of the regulatory components of the

AERMOD modeling system. It incorporates air dispersion based on planetary boundary layer

turbulence structure and scaling concepts.

Meteorological Parameters

Surface meteorological data at project site was collected for one year (Oct-Dec, 2018). The

hourly meteorological data considered during this period were:

Wind speed;

Wind Direction;

Ambient atmospheric temperature;

Cloud cover;

Solar insolation;

Relative Humidity

Following parameters were considered for dispersion modeling – Point source:

Quantity of fuel;

Emission rate of pollutants

Stack:



Internal diameter at top of stack;

Height of stack;

Exit gas velocity;

Exit gas temperature.

Source of Emission

Impacts on ambient air, during operation phase, would be due to emissions from operation

of boiler also during power failure, the set of 100 KVA capacity will be used as power

backup. The fuel will be HSD in DG sets and Natural Gas in Steam boiler. The flue gas

stacks will be considered as point of pollutants‟ emission source.

Further, the P2O5 & NH3 will be emitted from the Reactor. These stacks/Vents emission

source will be considered as point source.

Also, the raeactor vent is attached to two Stage water scrubber. These stacks/vents will be

considered and done air dispersion modeling separately.

The stack details alongwith emission rate of Pollutants are given in Table 4-5 & Table 4-6.

Sta

ck

No.

Stack Attached to

Capacity

Height

(m)

Diameter(m)

Gas Exit

Velocity,

(m/s)

Gas Exit Temp,

oC

Fuel

Natural Gas

Consumption

(SCM/hr)

SO2 Emitte

d (gm/s

ec)

NOx Emitte

d (gm/s

ec)

1 Steam Boiler

0.2 TPH

11 0.30 5 80 Natural

Gas 15

0.00004

0.06

Assumptions

The dispersion modeling assumptions considered are as follows:

The emission rate for PM, SO2 was calculated based on the Specification of Natural

gas as well as the NOx was calculated based on GPCB emission standards.

The emission rate for P2O5 & PM was calculated based on the Natioanl Emission

Standards for Pesticide Manufacturing and Formulation Industry.

The terrain of the study area was considered as FLAT.

Stability class was evaluated based on solar insulation and cloud cover.

The mathematical equations used for the dispersion modeling assumes that the earth

surface acts as a perfect reflector of plume and physic-chemical processes such as

dry and wet deposition and chemical transformation of pollutants are negligible.

Study has been conducted for summer season 1st October – 31st December, 2018. The stack

emission concentrations used for dispersion modeling were taken as per CPCB guidelines.



Table 4-5: Proposed Stack Emission

Stack No.

Stack Attached to

Capacity

Height

(m)

Diameter(m)

Gas Exit

Velocity,

(m/s)

Gas Exit Temp,

oC

Fuel

Natural Gas

Consumption

(SCM/hr)

SO2 Emitte

d (gm/s

ec)

NOx Emitte

d (gm/s

ec)

1 Steam Boiler

0.2 TPH

11 0.30 5 80 Natur

al Gas

15 0.0000

4 0.06

Table 4-6: Proposed Vent Emission & APCM

Vent

No.

Vent Attache

d to

Height

(m)

Diameter(m)

Gas Exit

Velocity, (m/s)

Gas Exit Temp,

oC

Pollutant

Permissible limit

(mg/Nm3)

APCM

Emissoin

(gm/sec)

1 Reactor 11 0.5 3.0 50 P2O5 10

Two Stage Water Scrubb

er

0.00007 (P2O5)

Air Quality Dispersion Modeling

Emission from Flue Gas Stacks

Sulfur Oxide (SO2)

The results of incremental GLC for SO2 for the above mentioned emissions Table 4-5 from

flue gas stacks are provided in Annexure 5. The Isopleth for the same is given as Figure

4-1.



Figure 4-1: Isopleth for Incremental GLC of Oxides of Sulphur (SO2) from Flue Gas Stack



Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX)

The results of incremental GLC for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) for the above mentioned

emissions Table 4-5 from flue gas stacks are provided in Annexure 5. The Isopleth for the

same is given as Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2: Isopleth for Incremental GLC of Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) from Flue Gas Stack



Emission from Vents

Phosphorous Pentoxide (P2O5)

The results of incremental GLC for P2O5 for the above mentioned emissions Table 4-5 from

flue gas stacks are provided in Annexure 5. The Isopleth for the same is given as Figure

4-3.

Figure 4-3: Isopleth for Incremental GLC of P2O5 from Reactor Vent



Prediction of Incremental GLC of Pollutants on Air Environment

Results

The incremental increase in GLC of SO2, PM , NOx and P2O5 due to consumption of natural

gas for proposed steam boiler and vent attached to Reactor is presented in Table 4-7.

The worst combined environmental situation is predicted as the sum of Maximum monitored

value of a parameter and the incremental GLC at the monitoring location.

Table 4-7: 24 hourly average incremental increase in GLC – Flue gas stacks & vents

S.No.

Name of Village/ Industry

(Distance in km/

Direction)

Pollutant

Maximum Monitored Baseline

Concentration

(µg/m3)

Incremental GLC

(µg/m3) Total Predictive GLC

(µg/m3)

Flue gas

stacks

Process Vents

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7=C4+C5+C6

1 At Prject Site

[-, -]

SO2 17.6 0.003 - 17.603

NOX 23.0 3.42 - 26.42

P2O5 - - 0.007 0.007

2

At Punat

[5.6 Km, ENE direction]

SO2 14.4 0.0001 - 14.4001

NOX 20.6 0.08 - 20.68

P2O5 - - 0.00003 0.00003

3

At Sarigam

[2.0 Km, E direction]

SO2 14.4 0.0002 - 14.4002

NOX 22.8 0.21 - 23.01

P2O5 - - 0.0003 0.0003

4

At Sarai

[4.6 Km, WSW direction]

SO2 15.3 0.0001 - 15.3001

NOX 23.1 0.16 - 23.26

P2O5 - - 0.00031 0.00031

5

At Malav

[6.34 Km, SSE direction]

SO2 14.4 0.0002 - 14.4002

NOX 20.8 0.20 - 21

P2O5 - - 0.00049 0.00049

6

At Fansa

[7.94 Km, NW direction]

SO2 14.4 0.00001 - 14.40001

NOX 20.4 0.02 - 20.42

P2O5 - - 0.00002 0.00002

7

At Pali Karambeli

[8.96 Km, N direction]

SO2 15.4 0.00001 - 15.40001

NOX 21.4 0.01 - 21.41

P2O5 - - 0.00002 0.00002

8

At Chandor

[9.58 Km, NE direction]

SO2 13.8 0.00002 - 13.80002

NOX 20.5 0.02 - 20.52

P2O5 - - 0.00002 0.00002

BDL: Below Detectable Limit

It is observed as follows:





the SW direction.



the West direction.



the SW direction.

The concentration limit for SO2 and NOx in the ambient air, as specified by CPCB is 80

µg/m3, Hence, the predicted impact level due to the operation of Steam Boiler & Vents

attached to Reactor are within the prescribed limits of CPCB for the ambient air quality.

Consequently, ambient air quality due to proposed activities is not expected to cause an

effect on vegetation and human settlements in the vicinity of the operational sites.

Operational & design considerations of the diesel engines with respect to parameters such

as air-fuel ratio, fuel quality and rate of combustion would contribute to reduction / increase

in emission load to the air environment. The level of maintenance of the engines as well as

their make and age will also influence the air emissions. Ensuring that operating conditions

are managed as per standard operating procedures is therefore, of importance.

Mitigation Measures

General Mitigation Measures for Air Quality Control during Operation Phase:

Greenbelt will be developed at the facility.

Attenuation of pollution/protection of receptor through greenbelt/green cover.

Regular monitoring of air pollutant concentrations.

All trucks shall be PUC Certified from time to time.

DG Set will be operated during power failure only.



Potential impacts on Air Environment /Nearby Ambient Air Quality are tabulated in Table 4-8.

Table 4-8: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Air Environment

S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude (+ve)

& (-ve)

Air

Total Score

Significance / Consequence

Mitigation Measures

AP/AQ

Scale of Importance 7


1.2 Excavation and paving of site

N Dust generation 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -7 Low

Regular water sprinkling will be done and Dust mask will be

provided

1.4

Vehicular movement for transportation of construction material

and waste

N Emission of HC

& CO 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -7 Low

Maintaining the speed limit of

vehicle transporting construction

materials. Entry only PUC certified

vehicles



N Emission of

P2O5 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -21 Medium

Two stage water scrubber will be

provided

N

Generation of Phosphine gas reacts with Acid

& water

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -21 Medium Two stage water scrubber will be

provided





etc. N

Emission of PM, SO2 and NOx from D.G &

Boiler

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -21 Medium Boiler with chimney of adequate height

will be provided

3.5 Green belt

developement N


1,2,3,4,5 5 35 High Not Applicable

3.8


raw materials, finished goods and

Industrial Waste

N Emission of HC

& CO 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -21 Medium

PUC Certified vehicles shall be

used



Environmental Impacts on Construction Phase:

Dust generation during excavation and paving at site.

Emission of HC and CO during Vehicular movement for transportation of construction

material and waste.

Mitigation Measures

Regular monitoring of air pollutant concentrations.

Mainain speed limits of vehicals for transportation of construction works.

All trucks shall be PUC Certified from time to time.

Operational Phase

Environmental Impacts:

Emission of P2O5 during process.

Generation of Phosphine gas reacts with Acid & water during reaction and process.

Emission of PM, SO2 and NOx from operaton of D.G & Boiler

Emission of HC and CO during Vehicular movement for transportation of construction

material and waste.

Mitigation Measures:

Water sprinkling shall be done on the paved/road prior and during unloading. All

transfer point locations would be fully enclosed.

Transportation vehicles will be covered with tarpaulin sheet while transporting

materials.

Use of DG set during emergency only.

Adequate stack height of the chimney will be provided.

Two stage water scrubber will be provided.

Thick Greenbelt development

Dust masks have been/will be provided to workers.



4.1.3 Noise Environment

Operational controls and mitigation measures are provided against noise generating activities is given in Table 4-9.

Table 4-9: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Noise Environment

S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect


& (-ve)

NV

Total Score


Mitigation Measures



1.3




maintenance work

N Noise generation 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -5 Low

Use of properly certified, tested and

calibrated equipment‟s

1.4


construction material and waste

N Noise generation 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -5 Low

Well maintained vehicles and properly designed equipment

will be used



etc. N


1,2,3,4,5 -1 -5 Low Accoustic enclosures

would be provided

3.5 Green belt

developement N


1,2,3,4,5 5 25 Medium Not Applicable



S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect


& (-ve)

NV

Total Score


Mitigation Measures


3.8



N Noise generation 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -15 Medium


will be used



The potential impacts on noise level may arise out of the following:

Construction Phase

Impacts:

Noise generation due to construction activities, Fabrication work, operation of plant

machineries

Impact on environment due to vehicle movement for transportation of materials.


Provision of ear muffs and ear plugs to prevent noise exposure risk to labourers

working on site.

Avoid high noise generating activity during night-time and their frequency to be

minimized to avoid continuous noise exposure.

Vehicles having PUC certificates will only be allowed to transport materials and

equipment‟s at project site.

Unnecessary horn honking will be avoided and strictly prevented.

Operation Phase

Impacts:

Noise generation form operation of D.G set (in case of emergency only).

Noise generation from Vehicular movement for transportation of raw materials,

finished goods and Industrial Waste.


D.G set will be used in case of power failure.

PUC Certified vehicles will be used.

Regular maintenance & lubrication of utilities, equipments and vehicles will be carried

out.

Adequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ear plugs will be provided to

the workers working in high noise areas.

Tree plantation beside the road area will be carried out.

Development of greenbelt on periphery of plant premises will increase aesthetic view

as well as act as a barrier for noise.



4.1.4 Water Environment

Based on the identified project activities impact on water environment is accessed. Scoring of the same is done and mitigation measures are

prepared based on these scores which are given inTable 4-10.

Table 4-10:Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Water Environment

S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude (+ve) & (-

ve)

Water & Wastewater

Total Score

(Scale of Importance × Scale of

Magnitude)


Mitigation Measures

SW(4)

GW(4)

Effluent (5)


1.5

Influx of workers during

construction phase

N Sewage

generation 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -5 Low

Sewage would be disposed in septic tank



N Waste Water

Generation 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -27 Medium

Effluent will be treated in proposed ETP


3.1

Operation of D.G Set, Cooling tower, Boiler,

etc.

N

Generation of waste

water from Cooling and Boiler Blow

Down

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -27 Medium Effluent will be treated in

proposed ETP

3.2 Equipment and Floor Washing

N Generation

of waste water

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -15 Medium Effluent will be treated in

proposed ETP

3.3 Operation of ETP N Waste Water

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -27 Medium Treated water from ETP

will be utilized for



Generation scrubbing


operational phase

N Sewage

generation 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -3 -27 Medium

Sewage would be disposed in septic tank

3.9

Raw water intake for Plant

Operation and Domestic Uses

N Consumption of water

1,2,3,4,5 -4 -16 Medium

RWH practices to reduce fresh water

consumption. Check water consumption through flow meters

3.10 Storm water management

AN

Mixing of process

drains with rainwater

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -2 -20 Medium

Separate drain for storm water with parapet wall and bumps. First rain

water will be reuse in the process



A number of sources from proposed project can cause potential impacts on water

environment which includes groundwater, surface water and effluent generation:

Construction Phase:

Impacts:

Sewage and domestic waste generation due to Influx of workers which will be is/ will

be disposed in STP.

Untreated sewage from construction area may have negative impact.

Mitigation Measures suggested:

Generated sewage is/ will be disposed of into Septic tank via soak pit

Proper Sanitation facility will be developed for construction workers.

Operational Phase

Impacts:

Waste water generation from manufacturing activities.

Generation of waste water from Cooling and Boiler Blow Down.

Generation of waste water from operation of ETP and floor washing.

Sewage generation from influx of workers.

Consumption of water for process and domestic uses.

Mixing of plant drain with rainwater during rainfall.

Mitigation Measures suggested:

Waste water will be treated into ETP and treated water from ETP will be utilized for

scrubbing.

Generated sewage is/ will be disposed of into Septic tank via soak pit.

Reuse of waste water and RWH practices to reduce fresh water consumption. Check

water consumption through flow meters

Separate drain for storm water, Management will be proposed to avoid run off

contamination.

.



4.1.5 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

Based on the identified project activities impact due to Waste generation is access. Scoring of the same is done and mitigation measures are

prepared based on these scores which are given in Table 4-11.

Table 4-11: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude

(+ve) & (-ve)

Waste Generation

Total Score


Mitigation Measures

HW

(8)

C&D

(4)

SW

(4)


Magnitude)


1.2 Excavation and paving of site N Generation of

debris 1,2,3,4,5 -1

-4 Low

Debris will be reused in filling low lying

area

1.3

Fabrication work for erecting major plant equipment including operation of

equipment like crane, concrete mixtures, vibrators etc. and

preventive maintenance work

N Generation of

scraps 1,2,3,4,5 -1 -4 Low

Scraps will be handled as per rules

and sold to authorized

vendors


2.1 Reactions Processes N Spillage and

Leakage of Raw Material/ Prduct

1,2,3,4,5 -1 -8 Low Paved area will be

provided


3.3 Operation of ETP N Generation of ETP

waste 1,2,3,4,5 -3 -24 Medium

ETP sludge will be disposed at TSDF

Site



S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude

(+ve) & (-ve)

Waste Generation

Total Score


Mitigation Measures

HW

(8)

C&D

(4)

SW

(4)


Magnitude)

3.7 Loading and Unloading of chemicals, products etc.

N

Generation of Waste

Drums/Barrels/bags and containers

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -24 Medium

Waste Drums/Barrels/bags and containers will be handed over to authorized recycler

3.8 Equipment maintenance N Generation of used oil and lubricants

1,2,3,4,5 -2 -16 Medium

Used oil and lubricants will be handed over to

authorized recycler

3.9 Equipment maintenance N Generation of

scraps and used spares etc.

1,2,3,4,5

-1 -4 Low

Scraps will be handled as per rules

and sold to authorized

vendors



A number of sources in production of proposed product can cause generation of Solid and

Hazardous waste:

Construction Phase:

Impact:

Generation of scrap during febrication activities.

Generation of debris during construction activities

Mitigation measure:

Generated scraps will be handled as per rules and sold to authorized vendors

Daily collection of waste will be carried out and composting of this waste will used as

manure for greenbelt and vegetable farms development.

Operation Phase:

Impact:

Generation of Waste Drums/Barrels/bags and containers from loadinhg and

unloading of chemicals.

Spillage and leakages of raw materials and products from manufacturing process.

Generation of ETP waste from operation of ETP.

Sewage generation from influx of workers.

Generation of used oil, lubricants, scraps and used spares etc. from equipment

maintenance.

Mitigation measure:

Waste Drums/Barrels/bags and containers will be handed over to authorized recycler

Used oil and lubricants will be handed over to authorized recycler

Scraps will be handled as per rules and sold to authorized vendors

Proper sanitation and disposal of sewage sludge will be carried out


4.1.6 IMPACTS ON LAND ENVIRONMENT

Scoring of the same is done and mitigation measures are prepared based on these scores

which are given in Table 4-12.



Table 4-12: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Land Environment

Environmental Components

S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude

(+ve) & (-ve)

Land Environment and Natural Resource

Total Score(Scale of Importance ×

Scale of Magnitude)


Mitigation Measures

LU/ LC

(1)

Soil

(3)

Resources

(8)

Land Environment and Natural Resource

1.1 Site clearance N

Removal of top soil &

Land clearence

1,2,3,4,5 0 -1 -3 Low

Top soil will be stacked seprately

and will be used for

plantation.


N

Spillage and Leakage of

Raw Material/ Prduct

1,2,3,4,5 0 -1 -3 Low Paved area

will be provided

3.9

Raw water intake for Plant Operation and Domestic Uses

N Consumption

of water 1,2,3,4,5 0 -4 -32 High

RWH practices to

reduce fresh water consumptio

n. Check water

consumption through

flow meters



A number of sources can cause potential impacts on Land: LU/LC, Soil and HG

environments. Based on the identified project activities, impact is accessed.

Construction Phase:

Impacts:

Removal of top soil and land clearance during site clearance.

Mitigation Measures Suggested:

Top soil will be stacked seprately and will be used for plantation.

Operation Phase:

Impacts:

Contamination of soil due to generation of used oil from utility and spillage and leakage of raw material/product from manufacturing process.

Consuptoin of water due to Raw water intake for Plant Operation and Domestic Uses

Mitigation Measures Suggested:

Raw material will be handled, stored and transported as per manufacture, storage and import as per Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.

Impervious flooring will be provided.

RWH practices to reduce fresh water consumption. Check water consumption through flow meters

4.1.7 Ecology & Biodiversity Environment

Operational controls and mitigation measures are provided against activities identified

having impacts on Ecology & Biodiversity Environment are given in Table 4-13.

Table 4-13: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Ecology& Biodiversity

S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E s

itu

ati

on

s

Identified

Aspect

Scale of Magnitude (+ve) & (-ve)

Ecology & Biodiversit

y

Total Score

(Scale of Importan

ce × Scale of

Magnitude)

Significance /

Consequence

Mitigation

Measures

Ter.

(2)

Aqu.

(3)


N Emission

of P2O5 1,2,3,4,5 -2 -4 Low

Two stage water

scrubber will be

installed with 11m

high Stack

3.8

Vehicular movement

for transportation of raw

N Emission of HC &

CO 1,2,3,4,5 -2 -4 Low

Only Vehicles with valid PUC will

be



S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E s

itu

ati

on

s

Identified

Aspect

Scale of Magnitude (+ve) & (-ve)

Ecology & Biodiversit

y

Total Score

(Scale of Importan

ce × Scale of

Magnitude)

Significance /

Consequence

Mitigation

Measures

Ter.

(2)

Aqu.

(3)

materials, finished

goods and Industrial

Waste

allowed

3.10

Storm water management

AN

Mixing of process drains with

rainwater

1,2,3,4,5 -2 -3 -13 Medium

Separate drain for

storm water with

parapet wall and bumps.

First rain water will be reuse

in the process

A number of sources in production of proposed product can cause impact on Ecology and

Biodiversity.

Operation Phase:

Impact:

Emission of P2O5 from manufacturing process.

Emission of HC and CO from Vehicular movement for transportation of raw materials,

finished goods and Industrial Waste

Mixing of process drains with rainwater

Mitigation Measure:

Scrubbing systems with adequate stack height will be provided for reduction of

process emission.

Only Vehicles with valid PUC will be allowed

Separate drain for storm water with parapet wall and bumps. First rain water will be

reuse in the process

Local species will be planed as per soil conditions; regular maintenance of greenbelt

is being/will be done.

4.1.8 Socio Economic

The manpower requirement for the proposed project activity will be expected to generate

some secondary jobs for the operation and maintenance. This will temporarily increase the

employment opportunity. Secondary jobs shall also bound to be generated to provide day-to-



day needs and services to the work force. This will also temporarily increase the demand for

essential daily utilities in the local market.

The proposed activities shall generate indirect employment in the region due to the

requirement of workers in trail making, supply of raw material, auxiliary and ancillary works,

which would marginally improve the economic status of the people. The activities would

result in an increase in local skill levels through exposure to activities.

Occupational Health

During construction period, periodic check-ups of all the employees shall be done regularly.

Workers will be provided with basic amenities like safe water supply, low cost sanitation

facilities, first aid, required personal protective equipment, etc.



Table 4-14: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Socio Economic

S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude

(+ve) & (-ve)

Social Total Score

(Scale of Importance ×

Scale of Magnitude)


Mitigation Measures

Infra.

(6)

Economic

(9)

1.4

Vehicular movement for

transportation of construction

material and waste

N Increase in traffic load

1,2,3,4,5 -1 -6 Low

Transportation trips will be scheduled

appropriately


during construction phase

N Employme

nt generation

1,2,3,4,5 2 18 Medium Not Applicable

2.2 Export of Product N Increase in

market scenario



operational phase N

Employment

Generation 1,2,3,4,5 5 45 High Not Applicable

3.6 Socio Economic

improvement N

CER Activity


3.8


transportation of raw materials,

finished goods and Industrial Waste


1,2,3,4,5 -3 -18 Medium

Transportation trips will be scheduled

appropriately



4.1.9 Health and safety (RH)

Identified having impacts on Health and safety are given in Table 4-15.

Table 4-15: Impact Scoring and Mitigation Measures for Health and safety

S. No.

Project Activity

N

/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude

(+ve) & (-ve)

Health &

Safety

Total Score

(Scale of Importance × Scale of Magnitude)


Mitigation Measures

6

1.2 Excavation and paving of site

N Dust


Regular water sprinkling will be done and Dust mask will be

provided

AN Fall in pit, land

sliding from sidewalls

1,2,3,4,5 -2 -12 Medium Appropriate benches will be

provided for safe movement and PPEs will be provided to workers

1.4


transportation of construction

material and waste


1,2,3,4,5 -1 -6 Low Transportation trips will be scheduled appropriately

N Emission of HC & CO

1,2,3,4,5 -1 -6 Low

Maintaining the speed limit of vehicle transporting construction

materials. Entry only PUC certified vehicles

N Noise


Well maintained vehicles and properly designed equipment will

be used


N Emission of

P2O5 1,2,3,4,5 -2 -12 Medium

Two stage water scrubber will be provided

N

Spillage and Leakage of

Raw Material/ Prduct

1,2,3,4,5 -1 -6 Low Paved area will be provided



S. No.

Project Activity

N/ A

N/

E

sit

uati

on

s

Identified Aspect

Scale of Magnitude

(+ve) & (-ve)

Health &

Safety

Total Score

(Scale of Importance × Scale of Magnitude)


Mitigation Measures

6

N

Generation of Phosphine gas

reacts with Acid & water

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -18 Medium

Keep away from heat, hot surfaces, sparks, open flames and

other ignition sources. No smoking. Use only non-sparking

tools.

Select eye protection in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR

1910.133.

3.8


transportation of raw materials, finished goods and Industrial

Waste

N Emission of HC & CO

1,2,3,4,5 -3 -18 Medium Appropriate benches will be

provided for safe movement and PPEs will be provided to workers



A number of sources in production of proposed product can cause impact on Risk and

hazards.

Construction Phase:

Impact:

Generation of dust and impact on human health during site clearance

Chances of accident during vehicle movement.

Emission of HC and CO due to vehicular movement.

Generated noise during vehicular movement.

Mitigation Measure:

Well trained, licensed and certified motor vehicle driver is being/will be given job for transportation.

Maintaining the speed limit of vehicle transporting construction materials. Entry only PUC certified vehicles

All transportation within the main working will be carried out directly under the supervision and control of the management.

PPE„s are being/will be provided to workers.

Operation Phase:

Impact:

Emission of P2O5 due to manufacturing process.

Chances of accident to workers due to spillage, during handling of raw materials.

Generation of Phosphine gas reacts with Acid & water

Emission of HC & CO during vehicular movement for transportation of raw materials and finished goods.

Mitigation Measure:

Two stage water scrubber will be provided for the control of Emission of P2O5.

Paved area will be provided for Spillage and Leakage of Raw Material/ Prduct

Standard operating procedure is in place and is being/will be strictly followed by workers.

PPE„s are being/will be provided to workers.

Appropriate benches will be provided for safe movement and PPEs will be provided to workers

Preventive maintenance of mechanical equipments will be done periodically.

Safety training is being/will be provided to workers.

4.2 IMPACT ON TRAFFIC

From the proposed facility, approximately on daily basis 5 trucks per day carrying chemicals

other waste shall be using the state highway 185 and National Highway-8 Employees and

contract workers (~ 5 cars, 10 two wheelers & 15 cycles) shall use the same route during

peak hours (i.e. morning 0800 hours to 1030 hours and evening 1600 hours to 2000 hours).

As per the Traffic scenarios considered with respect to the LOS value, the Capacity of

existing roads indicates that the performance of NH-8 is very good and is sufficient to

support the additional traffic load. Hence there will be minimum impact on the existing

Traffic.



Impacts

Increase in transportation will lead to increase in road traffic.

Dispersion of dust and particulate matters from open truck

Emission of pollutants like HC, SO2, CO, CO2.

Noise generation from vehicular movement.

Spillage or leak of materials during transportation.

Mitigation measures

The trucks transporting materials will be covered.

It will be assured that vehicles are PUC certified.

Adequate measures will be taken to avoid spillage or leak of raw material and drivers

will be instructed to control leakages and collection of spilled material.

Ensuring the availability of valid Pollution under Control Certificates (PUCC) for all

vehicles used on site.



5 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

5.1 SITE ALTERNATIVES

The Proposed unit will be located within GIDC Sarigam which has all the ancillary facilities

required for the project and is well connected through National Highways, State Highways

and Railway Networks

Following are additional benefits for site selection:

Availability of internal infrastructure

Connectivity for transportation of material

Availability of skilled manpower

Availability of utilities like water, power

Good hold on local market

Considering the above stated benefits, the site is considered as most suitable.

5.2 TECHNOLOGY ALTERNATIVES

The manufacturing process/ technology selected is simple, cost effective and has less

negative impact to environment and resources.

During EIA study some alternatives for technology and other parameters were considered

and are discussed below:

Alternative of site and technology are evaluated and provided in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1: Alternative for technology and other parameter

Sr. no Site Particular Option 1-

Existing

site

Option 2 –

Alternative

site

Option – 1

Suitable

Option – 2

Suitable

1 Land Available To purchase

new

Yes No

2 Cost No cost as

it is owned

Involve huge

cost

Yes No

3 Internal

infrastructure,

roads,

buildings and

Already well

developed

To be

developed

will have

cost and time

Yes No



utilities factors.

4 Other

information in

the area

Available Available Yes Yes

5 Availability of

labour

Available Available Yes Yes

6 Manufacturing

facility

Facilities

available

New

construction

&

development

Yes No

7 Finished

goods

customers

Developed

in vicinity

To be

develop

Yes No

With reference to above table for propesd project we are selecting option 1 forsite selection.



6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

In order to measure effectiveness of mitigation measures, technical aspects like

measurement methodologies, frequency, location, data analysis, reporting schedules,

emergency procedures & procurement schedules are covered in this chapter along with

detailed budget.

6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

Technical aspects of Environmental Monitoring for air, water, noise and land environment

are summarized in tabulated form as follows:


Detailed environmental monitoring program for air environment is given in Table 6-1.



Table 6-1: Environmental Monitoring Program for Air Environment


Project Activity

Identified Aspect Mitigation Measured

Implementation and Management

Data Analysis

Measurement Methodology

Frequency Location Reporting Schedule/

Responsibility

Air

Excavation and paving of

site Dust generation

Regular water sprinkling will be done and Dust mask will

be provided SPM

PM Gravimetric

IS:5182 (Part 23) 2006

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site EHS Manager,

Safety Officer

Vehicular movement for transportation

of construction material and

waste

Emission of HC & CO

Maintaining the speed limit of vehicle transporting

construction materials. Entry only PUC certified vehicles

PM10 PM2.5,

Sox

PM10-Gravimetric

IS:5182 (Part 23) 2006 PM2.5-

Gravimetric IS:5182

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site

EHS Manager,

Plant head

Reactions Processes

Emission of P2O5 Two srage water scrubber will

be provided

Principal parameters and methodology will be

followed as per IS method

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

Process Stack

EHS Manager,

Utility supervisor

Operation of D.G Set,


Emission of PM, SO2 and NOx from

D.G & Boiler

Boiler with chimney of adequate height will be

provided

SO2 & NOx in stack of Boiler

Stack monitoring by

Isokinetic sampling IS:11255

During operation of Boiler

Flue gas stack

EHS Manager,

Utility

supervisor

PM10, PM2.5, SOx,

NOx in ambient air and within

PM10-Gravimetric

IS:5182 (Part 23) 2006

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At 2 locations (site and village in

downwind)

EHS Manager,

Utility

supervisor PM2.5-Gravimetric

IS:5182




Project Activity



Data Analysis



Responsibility

plant premise

SO2: Colorimetric IS:5182 (Part

II) 2001

NOx: Colorimetric IS:5182 (Part

VI) 2006


of raw materials, finished

goods and Industrial

Waste

Emission of HC & CO

PUC Certified vehicles shall be used

PM10 PM2.5,

Sox

PM10-Gravimetric

IS:5182 (Part 23) 2006 PM2.5-

Gravimetric IS:5182

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site

Maintenance in-charge,

Purchase department,

Safety Officer




Detailed environmental monitoring program for noise environment is given in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2: Environment Monitoring Program for Noise Environment


Project Activity Identified Aspect

Mitigation Measured


Data Analysis


Frequency Location

Reporting Schedule/

Responsibility

Noise

Fabrication work for erecting major plant equipment including operation of equipment like crane,

concrete mixtures, vibrators etc. and preventive maintenance work

Noise generation

Use of properly certified, tested and

calibrated equipment‟s

Leq Levels for Day and

night time

ISLM 100

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site


Purchase department


material and waste

Noise generation


will be used


night time

ISLM 100

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site

EHS Manager,

Safety Officer

Operation of D.G Set, Cooling tower, Boiler, etc.

Noise generation from D.G

Set

Accoustic enclosures would be provided


night time

ISLM 100

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site

EHS Manager,


Purchase department



Noise generation


will be used


night time

ISLM 100

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site

EHS Manager,

Safety Officer




Detailed environmental monitoring program for water environment is given in Table 6-3.

Table 6-3: Environmental Monitoring Program for Water Environment


Project Activity



Data Analysis



Responsibility

Water and Wastewater

Reactions Processes

Waste Water Generation


Inlet and outlet characteristics as per consent condition and Methodology will be

followed as per IS method.

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At ETP

EHS Manager,

Design head

Operation of D.G Set,


Generation of waste water from Cooling

and Boiler Blow Down


Equipment and Floor Washing

Generation of waste water


Operation of ETP

Waste Water Generation

Treated water from ETP will be utilized for scrubbing



Separate drain for storm water with parapet wall and bumps. First rain water will be reuse in

the process



Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site ETP In charge / Third Party



6.1.4 Land Environment and Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

Detailed environmental monitoring program for Land Environment and Solid Waste, Construction Waste and Hazardous waste is given in Table

6-4.

Table 6-4: Land Environment and Solid and Hazardous Waste Management


Project Activity Identified Aspect Mitigation Measured


Data Analysis



Responsibility

Land Environment

Excavation and paving of site

Generation of debris

Debris will be reused in filling low lying area

Quantity of debris

Approximation Daily At site

EHS Manager,

Civil supervisor



mixtures, vibrators etc. and preventive maintenance work

Generation of scraps


Quantity of scraps

Record of quantity

generated Daily At site

EHS Manager,

Procurement

head

Reactions Processes

Spillage and Leakage of Raw Material/ Prduct

Paved area will be provided

Quantity of Waste


EHS Manager,

Procurement

head

Operation of ETP Generation of ETP

waste ETP sludge will be

disposed at TSDF Site Quantity of Waste

Record of quantity

generated Daily At site EHS Manager

Loading and Unloading of

chemicals, products etc.

Generation of Waste

Drums/Barrels/bags and containers

Waste Drums/Barrels/bags

and containers will be handed over to

authorized recycler

Quantity of Waste

Record of quantity


Procurement head




Project Activity Identified Aspect Mitigation Measured


Data Analysis



Responsibility

Equipment maintenance

Generation of used oil and lubricants

Used oil and lubricants will be handed over to

authorized recycler

Quantity of Waste

Record of quantity


EHS Manager,

Maintenance

in-charge


Generation of scraps and used

spares etc.


Quantity of Waste

Record of quantity

generated Daily At site EHS Manager

Site clearance Removal of top soil & Land clearence

Top soil will be stacked seprately and

will be used for plantation.

Quantity of Soil


EHS Manager,

Civil supervisor

Reactions Processes

Spillage and Leakage of Raw Material/ Prduct

Paved area will be provided

Quantity of Waste

Approximation Daily At site Civil supervisor

6.1.5 Ecology & Biodiversity Environment

Detailed environmental monitoring program for Ecology and Biodiversity is given in Table 6-5.

Table 6-5: Manamgeent of Ecology and biodiversity Envieoronment


Project Activity



Data Analysis



Responsibility


Reactions Processes

Emission of P2O5 Two stage water scrubber will

be installed with 11m high Stack



Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

Process Stack

EHS Manager




of raw materials,

finished goods and Industrial

Waste

Emission of HC & CO

Only Vehicles with valid PUC will be allowed

PM10 PM2.5,

Sox

PM10-Gravimetric

IS:5182 (Part 23) 2006 PM2.5-

Gravimetric IS:5182

Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site EHS Manager



Separate drain for storm water with parapet wall and bumps. First rain water will be reuse in

the process



Once a season

(Excluding rainy

season)

At site EHS Manager

6.1.6 Traffic Management Plan

An efficient traffic management program will be developed to ensure smooth and congestion free traffic movement on nearby state highway and

from Plant. This plan will be as shown in Table 6-6.

Table 6-6: Traffic Monitoring Program

Impacting Activity Mitigation Measures

Data Analysis Measurement Methodology


Responsibility

Emergency Procedure

Procurement Schedule


transportation of material and waste during construction

phase

Controlled vehicular

movement clearly

demarcated entry/exit

with adequate supervision

Records number of

trucks/tanker entry/exit

Manual

Throughout construction

and operation phase

Entry and exit gates

Security In-charge

Route for safe exit will be in place

During construction

and operation phase



6.2 SOCIO ECONOMIC

6.2.1 Social Welfare & Upliftment Plan

The company also proposes to carry out social welfare activities for the welfare of local

community. The company has proposed a detailed Corporate Environment Responsibility

(CER) Plan. Under this plan, the proponent has allocated a budget of Rs. 12 lakhs to be

spent within a span of 5 years in nearby villages like Punat, Sarai, Malav, Chandor and

Sarigam villages etc. Activities under the following areas have been identified and shall be

carried out:

Education and Youth Development

Infrastructure Development

Miscellaneous activities

Social – Awareness

Health – Awareness

Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER)

As per latest OM No. F. No.22-65/2017-IA, dated 1st May, 2018, the fund allocation for the

CER is Rs. 12 lakhs (2% of Additional Capital Investment of Rs. 6 crore for undertaking the

Socio Economic development activities. Budget with break up for initial three years is

provided in Table 6-7.

Table 6-7: Budget Break-up for CER Activities of 5 years

S. No.

Planned activities under CER as

per specific needs at nearest

villages

Budget (Rs. Lakhs)

1st

year 2nd

year 3rd

year 4th

year 5th

Year

Total (19-20) (20-21) (21-22) (22-23) (23-24)

Sarigam Village at 2.0 km/ E

1

Augmentation of furniture,

blackboard, repair work, etc. in village

schools

70,000 70,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 290,000

Punat Village at 5.6 km/ NEE

2 School uniform and

scholarship to students

40,000 20,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 90,000

3 Drinking water 50,000 25,000 25,000 20,000 20,000 140,000



Sarai Village at 4.6 km/ WSW

4 Providing toilets in villages -Swatch Bharat Abhiyan

100,000 80,000 80,000 50,000 50,000 360,000

5

Desilting of village ponds & water

awareness program

20,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 70,000

Malav Village at 6.34 km/ SSE

6

Awareness camp for local farmers to increase yield and provide seedlings

20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 100,000

Chandor Village 9.58 km/ NE

7 Community plantation

10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 50,000

8 Provide medical health checkup

camp 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 100,000

Grand Total 330,000 260,000 230,000 190,000 190,000 1,200,000

6.2.2 Environmental Monitoring and Management Cost

Above mentioned monitoring program and cost can be summarized as tabulated in Table

6-8.

Table 6-8: Summary of Environmental Monitoring Program

S. No.

Particular Parameter for Monitoring Frequency of Monitoring

1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring PM10, PM2.5. SO2, NOx Once a season (Excluding rainy

season)

2 Flue Stack Emission Monitoring SO2, NOx & PM in stack of Boiler Once a season (Excluding rainy

season)

3 Process Stack Emission Monitoring Principal parameters and

methodology will be followed as per IS method

Once a season (Excluding rainy

season)

4 Water Quality pH, TDS, SS, COD, BOD, Oil &

grease & Chlorides

Once a season (Excluding rainy

season)

5 Ambient Noise Monitoring Leq Levels for Day and night time Once a season (Excluding rainy

season)

6 Solid/Hazardous Waste generation

Records of quantity of generation, handling, storage and transportation

(disposal) of solid and hazardous waste will be maintained.

Daily



S. No.

Particular Parameter for Monitoring Frequency of Monitoring

7 Occupational Health Checkup

Pre-employment and periodical health checkup for eye test, lung

test, hearing capacity, skin test, step test and other test in respect of air borne concentration of hazardous

chemicals in ppm etc. of every employee.

Annually

8 Greenbelt Development Number of plantation (Units),

Number of Survived Plants/ Trees, Number of Poor plant/ Trees

Annually

9 Safety Audit Incedent/ Accident Record Annually

10 Compliance of EC conditions Submission of 6 monthly compliance

reports Half-Yearly

Monitoring of the above parameters will carried out to assess the performance of pollution

control equipment‟s installed to achieve the statutory norms. In case emissions/pollutant will

found to exceed the norms, the „on duty‟ personnel will check the relevant parameters and

take appropriate corrective actions. A record of corrective and preventive action will be

maintained as per requirement.

Expenditure to be incurred by Integrated chemisol on environmental management system is

tabulated in Table 6-9 and Table 6-10.

Table 6-9: Capital Cost for Environmental Management System

S. No. Component Capital Cost (INR)

1 Air Pollution Control 5,00,000

2 ETP 2,50,000

3 Solid / Hazardous Waste Management 75,000

4 Safety and Occupational Health Management 1,00,000

5 Greenbelt Development 75,000

Total 10,00,000

Table 6-10: Recurring/operating Cost Per Annum Environmental & Safety Management System

S. No.

Component Recurring Cost per

Annum (INR)

1 Air Pollution Control 1,00,000

2 ETP 1,00,000

3 Solid / Hazardous Waste Management 50,000

4 Safety and Occupational Health Management 75,000

Greenbelt Development 25,000

5 Environmental Monitoring 50,000

6 EC Complaince 1,00,000

Total 5,00,000



7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION

Since the proposed project is located in Notified Industrial Estate Public Consultation is not

applicable. Letter regarding location of unit in notified Industrial Estate of Sarigam is

attached as Annexure 3.



7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT

This chapter includes a brief description of Risk & Hazard study.

Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. proposes to establishe green field Technical grade pesticides


Technical locted at Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam, District - Valsad,

Gujarat shall handle chemicals, some of which are hazardous in nature by virtue of their

intrinsic chemical properties or their operating temperatures or pressures or a combination of

them. Fire, toxic release or combinations of them are the hazards associated with industrial

plants using hazardous chemicals. More comprehensive, systematic and sophisticated

methods of Safety Engineering, such as, Hazard Analysis and Qualitative/Quantitative Risk

Assessment have been developed to improve upon the integrity, reliability and safety of

industrial plants, the same has been discussed in detail under their respective headings.

Scope of Study

Compliance of TOR

Hazard Identification

Risk Management

Disaster management Plan

Methodology:

The steps involved in risk assessement methodology are as follows:

1. Hazard identification by studing the information on plant location, layout of the

equipment & process condition;

2. Hazard assessment by qualitative risk analysis and quantitative risk analysis.

Quantification of Hazard involves selection of most credible scenario or wort case

scenario; Eastimate consequences scenarios in the plant such as fire, explosion and

toxic effect; Eastimate frequence of occurance of any incident is to be found out by

reliability analysis;

3. Prioritize and Reduce Risk by providing control / mitigation measures;

4. Preparing disaster management plan to face any accident and disaster caused by

the project operations.

7.3 Hazard identification

7.3.1 Storage Details & Layout

Total Plant area 2351.25 m2 having storage area is provided for storage of Raw material

and Finished Product. The storage condition of liquid acid tanks is given in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1: Chemical Storage Details

Sr.No. Products Storage Condition

Temperature Pressure

1 Phosphorus Ambient Atmospheric

2 Aluminium Powder Ambient Atmospheric



Sr.No. Products Storage Condition

Temperature Pressure

3 Graphite Powder Ambient Atmospheric

4 Paraffin Wax Ambient Atmospheric

5 Zinc Powder Ambient Atmospheric

6 Red Phosphorous Ambient Atmospheric

7 Magnesium Oxide Ambient Atmospheric

8 Magnesium Phosphide Ambient Atmospheric

7.3.2 Layout map

The storage facilities for the raw material and finshed goods have been shown in the layout

map as shown in Map 7-1.

Map 7-1: Layout Plan Showing Storage Facilities

7.3.3 Chemical Properies

The information on the hazardouse properties from MSDS of the chemicals handled at the

site has been reviewed to identify the associated hazards. The Physico-chemical properties

of various chemicals are listed along with relevant hazard as per given in Table 7-2.

Table 7-2: Physico-chemical properties of Chemicals

SN Name of Chemical Storage Facility / Packing

Storage of Chemical

(MT/M)

Flash Point 0C

Storage condition

1 Phosphorus MS Barrel 50 MT < 20℃ NTP

2 Aluminium Powder Plastic bag 20 MT N/A Pressure-200 kg/m2



SN Name of Chemical Storage Facility / Packing

Storage of Chemical

(MT/M)

Flash Point 0C

Storage condition

Room Temp

3 Graphite Powder Plastic bag 5 MT N/A Pressure-200 kg/m

2

Room Temp

4 Paraffin Wax Plastic bag 5 MT >193°C Pressure-200 kg/m

2

Room Temp

5 Zinc Powder Plastic bag

Sepaate room 20 MT N/A

Pressure-200 kg/m2

Room Temp

6 Red Phosphorous MS Barrel 100 MT N/A Atm Pressure

Around 30 Deg C

7 Magnesium Oxide Plastic bag 2 MT Not

Combustible NTP

8 Magnesium Phosphide

20 kg corrugated

boxes 100 MT N/A

Pressure-400 kg/m2

Room Temp

NA: Not Available

7.4 QUALITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT

Many a times Risk involved in various processes / process equipment‟s cannot be

addressed completely by Consequence Analysis. As a conservative approach, these risks

have been considered separately under this topic.The approach is to identify hazards

associated in operation of equipment as well as in processes, assessing its impacts, ranking

the risk posed by it and finally to propose remedial actions/mitigation measures such that the

risk is minimized to tolerable level.

Qualitative Risk Assessment has been carried out for the following areas:

Hazard involving during Construction Phase;

Storage and Handling of Red Phophorus;

Storage and Handling of yellow Phosphorus;

Manufacturing of Zinc Phosphide;

Manufacturing of Magnesium Phosphide;

Storage and Handling of Phospine;

In Qualitative Risk Assessment, risk has been analyzed using methodology called HIRA-

Hazards Identification & Risk Assessment. In HIRA, major manual activities carried out by

plant personnel as well as contract labors have been considered. The Risk Matrix presented

in Table 7-3 is referred in evaluating the assessment. Risk acceptability criteria given in

Table 7-4.



Table 7-3: Risk Matrix for Qualitative Risk Assessment

Table 7-4: Risk Acceptability Criteria

LIKE HOOD/ PROBABILITY

SEVERITY

Catastrophic (Death/ System Loss)

Major/ Critical

(Serious injury/ Illness)

Moderate (Less

Serious Injury/ Illness)

Minor/ Marginal

(Minor Injury/ Illness)

Insignificant/Negligible (No injury /illness)

5 4 3 2 1

Almost Certain

E H H H M M

Likely D H H M M L

Possible C H M M M L

Unlikely B M M M L L

Impossible A M M L L L

Risk Range

Risk Acceptability

Criteria Remarks

H Unacceptable/

High Management‟s Decision/Action Plan Required. Potential off-site

Impact.

M Medium Generally Minor Impact. Acceptable with Management‟s Review.

Specific monitoring or SOP to be followed.

L Low Acceptable without Review. Manage through Routine Procedure.



Table 7-5: Hazard Identification and Risk Assesement

S. No. Process Or

Activity

Associated

Hazards

Health & Safety Impact (Risk)

Initial Risk


Residual Risk

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

A Hazard involving during Construction Phase

1 Site Clearence, excavation and paving of site

Dust generation & increase in

SPM/RSPM in air

Fall into pit due to caving the side


People

Risk of injury to workers

2 C M

Water spray on the ground before excavation.

Work permit procedure to be followed.

Shoring of the sides while manual digging the ground.

Use of dust mask.

1 B L

Fabrication work for erecting major plant equipment

including operation of

equipment like crane, concrete

mixtures, vibrators etc. and

preventive maintenance

work

Noise generation


People.

2 C M

Ear plugs will be provided / and use ensured. Grinding

will be carried out in a closed shed area to.Thick greenbelt will be developed to reduce the noise level going outside

factory premises

2 C M

2


material

Emission of PM10, HC, NOx, & CO

Noise generation

Health effect

Risk of injury to workers due to

accidents

2 E M

P.U.C Certfied Vehicles

Regular Maitenance of Vehicles

Speed control of the vehicles.

1 C L

B Storage and Handling of Red Phophorus



S. No. Process Or

Activity

Associated

Hazards


Initial Risk


Residual Risk

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

1 Loading & Unloading


pipe/container/ valves etc. if contct

with heat/sparks/open

flames/hot surfaces

Skin/Eye irritation.

Toxic Vapor inhalation etc.

2 C M

Safety glasses with side-shields conforming to EN166

for Eye Protection.

Use proper glove removal technique (without touching

glove's outer surface) to avoid skin contact with this product

for skin Protection.

Flame retardant antistatic protective clothing, for body

Protetion.

Store in cool place. Keep container tightly closed in a

dry and well-ventilated place.

2 B L

C Storage and Handling of yellow Phosphorus

1 Handling / Charging


pipe/container/ valves etc. if contact

with heat/sparks/open

flames/hot surfaces

Eye irritation and respiratory disorder.

2 C M

Inspection of Bags/Barrel.

Use of eye goggle & nose mask.

2 B L

D Manufacturing of Zinc Phosphide



S. No. Process Or

Activity

Associated

Hazards


Initial Risk


Residual Risk

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

Sev

eri

ty

Lik

elih

oo

d

Ris

k

1

Mixing of Yellow

Phosphorus and zinc

Powder into closed reactor.

Generation of P2O5


People.

Eye irritation and respiratory disorder

2 C M





2 B M

E Manufacturing of Magnesium Phosphide

1

Mixing of Magnesium

Phosphate and Magnesium

ground nut Oil MgO into

reaction pot.

Generation of P2O5


People.


2 C M





2 B M

F Storage and Handling of Phospine

Charging of Zinc Oxide,Red

phosphorus, Yellow

Phosphorus.

Releasing of Phospine gas.


People.


2 C M

Keep away from heat, hot surfaces, sparks, open flames and other ignition sources. No

smoking. Use only non-sparking tools.

Select eye protection in accordance with OSHA 29

CFR 1910.133.



7.4.1 Conclusion

It can be seen from the above table that:

After providing mitigation measure in Vehicular movement for transportation of

construction material activity of construction phase, the risk probability will change

from alomost certain to possible as well as its residual risk will change from medium

to low.

In Other than all activity, the risk probability will change from possible to unlikely as

well as its residual risk will change from medium to low.

7.5 CONTROL / MITIGATION MEASURES

Based on the risk assessment analysis following precautionary mitigation measures are

recommended for the project.

Work permit procedure to be followed;

Use of P.U.C Certified Vehicles;

Periodic Inspection of flanges/ferrule joints is carried out;

Acid proof flooring will be done at storage and handling area;

Inspection of Bags;

Fire extinguishers are kept available;

Use of Suitable protective clothing, gloves, and gumboot.

For various activities the adequate mitigation mesures are provided in Table 7-5.

7.5.1 General Safety Measures for Construction Phase

The following will be implemented by the contractor while carrying out civil construction.

Required PPE will be provided to cover occupational foot, head, hearing, and eye protection.

Fall Protection/ Working at height: The Contractor is required to provide fall protection to

employees who are working at heights equal to or greater than 1.8 m. fall protection can be

in the form of perimeter protection such as guardrails and toe rails, personal protective

equipment (PPE), a safety monitoring system, or a fall protection plan. Activities that require

personal fall protection systems include steel erection bolting, riveting, fitting-up and

plumbing-up, work over water and some deep excavation work.

Foot Protection: If machines or operations present the potential for foot injury, the

contractor will provide foot protection with safe design and construction for the work to be

performed. Workers and visitors shall not be allowed on a construction site without safety

boots. The foot protection will be provided for workers working with concrete or cement.

Gum boot shall be provided to avoid contact with cement/RCC mixtures and mortar.

Head Protection: If head hazards remain after all steps have been taken to control them

(safety nets for work at heights, proper housekeeping), the Contractor will provide workers

with appropriate head protection. Safety helmet will be recommended. When the worker is

carrying load on the head a suitable head protection will be provided.



Noise Protection: Workers shall wear hearing protection devices (ear plugs, ear muffs,

canal caps), whenever the diesel operated engines, DG set or other noisy machines are

operating in the area.

Eye Protection: When operations present potential eye injury from physical or chemical

elements, the Contractor will select, provide, maintain and required affected workers to use

appropriate eye protection. Eye protection is required while working on RCC dismantling,

steel fabrication, welding, rough plastering and painting work. Any work which involves

looking upside also requires the protection e.g. electrical cabling on walls and ceiling. The

various eye protecting devices like safety glasses and goggles, face shields and welding

helmets will be provided to workers.

Hand protection: Suitable hand gloves shall be provided for working with cement or mortar.

A suitable anti-allergic cream or protecting gel shall be applied on the hands for persons who

develop allergy with cement or lime.

Electrical Safety:

A licensed electrician shall be deployed to complete all temporary wiring and

electrical installations required for construction activities.

Fuses and circuit breakers (ELCB‟s) shall be used to protect motherboards,

conductors and equipment to avoid short circuiting and electric shock. MCB‟s and

fuses will also to be used to protect the electrical equipment from over current and

over voltage.

Extension cords for equipment or as part of a temporary wiring system shall not be

damaged or compromised in any way and insulation must be of the highest grade.

The joints of electrical wires shall be avoided or an extension cord can be used if

needed

Anytime electrical equipment will be deactivated for repair, or circuits will be shut off,

the equipment will be locked out and tagged at the point where it can be energized.

Proper earthling will be ensured for all equipment and electrical panels

Temporary lights shall not be suspended by their cords.

The employer shall provide the necessary safety equipment, supplies and monitoring

equipment to their personnel.

During the operation stage maintenance of transformer and manning of electrical

substation shall be by the competent persons only.

7.5.2 Safety Measures for Transportation, Storage and Handling of

Chemicals

A. General safety measures for Transportation, Storage & Handling

Layout and location of hazardous chemical storage area will be based on natural and

Mechanical ventilation.

Spare barrels of sufficient quantity will be kept ready for any emergency spillage or

leakage.

Regular inspection of all the storage tanks of hazardous chemicals will be carried out.



Display Boards will be provided on all storage tanks which include the name of the

chemicals, Calibration of tanks and date of Painting.

All equipments related to hazardous chemical storage will be maintained and

calibrated regularly.

SOP for handling will be displayed in local language for safe operating procedure.

Standard procedure for unloading will be in place and will be implemented for safe

unloading of road tanker.

Muffler on the silencer of the tanker during entering in factory premises.

Water showering system (Automated sprinkling system) will be provided to the

flammable chemical storage area.

On site detectors for fire based on heat &/or smoke detection with alarm system will

be provided as required.

Adequate firefighting system will be provided as required. Details of the same are

elaborated in related section.

First aids boxes will also be provided at prominent places in the plant.

Area will be declared as “NO SMOKE ZONE”.

B. Safety measures for storage and handling of Phosphorus (Red, Yellow)

Storage

Ensure the container is tightly closed at all times.

Keep in a cool, dry, well-ventilated area away from incompatible materials and

conditions.

Containers which are opened must be carefully resealed and kept upright to prevent

leakage.

Avoid direct sunlight.

Avoid formation of dust and aerosols.

Provide appropriate exhaust ventilation at places where dust is formed.

Keep away from sources of ignition - No smoking.

Provide Labelling according Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008

Provide NFPA label.

Keep Away from water.

Handling

The lab where the material is being handled has an approved / certified emergency

eyewash and safety shower.

Ensure you are wearing the following minimum PPE: tightly fitting safety goggles

and face shield, fire/flame resistant lab coat, full length pants, close-toe rubber or

leather shoes, nitrile gloves.

Lab emergency contact information must be readily posted. Easy access to a

cellular phone or land line is readily available.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothing.

Avoid inhalation of vapor or mist.

Avoid Contact of water.



Personal Precaution

Wear respiratory protection. Avoid breathing vapors, mist or gas. Ensure adequate

ventilation. Evacuate personnel to safe areas. Do not attempt clean-up without

minimum PPE.

Environmental Precautions

Prevent further leakage or spillage – if safe to do so. Do not allow product to enter

drains.

Hygiene Measures

Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothing. Wash hands before breaks and

immediately after handling the product.

Engineering Controls

All operations should be carried out in a ventilated enclosure chemical fume hood to

keep airborne concentrations below recommended exposure limits. Use explosion-

proof ventilation equipment.

C. Safety Measures for Flammable Chemicals

Storage for sealed drums will be out of direct sunlight and remote from sources of

heat to avoid generation of pressure.

Drums will be stored at ground level and measures taken to prevent corrosion of the

drum base.

Adequate ventilation will be available to ensure that in case of incidental release of

chemicals (vapour) the vapour concentration is as low as possible, and in any event

within the regulatory requirements.

D. Safety Measures for Transportation of Raw Material

Training will be provided to driver and cleaner regarding the safe driving, hazards of

Flammable chemicals, emergency handling and use of SCBA sets.

TREM card will be kept with Threshold Limit.

SCBA set will be kept with TL.

Fire extinguishers will be kept with TL.

Flame arrestor will be provided to TL exhaust.

Instructions will be given not to stop road tanker in populated area.

Hazard Identification symbol and emergency telephone number will be displayed as

per HAZCHEM CODE.

Appropriate PPEs will be kept with TL.

In case of leak or spill: 1. Area will be isolated.

2. Container shall be isolated.

3. Source of leakage will be checked.

4. Damaged containers or spilled material shall not be attended without wearing

appropriate protective clothing.



5. Leakage will be stopped, if possible to do so without risk.

6. Water spray will be used to reduce vapors (but do not put water directly on leak, spill

area or inside container).

7. Combustibles (wood, paper, oil, etc.) will be kept away from spilled material.

E. Safety Measures for Unloading of Raw Material from Tanker

Priority will be given to Tanker to immediately enter the storage premises at site and

will not be kept waiting near the gate or the main road.

Security person will check License, TREM CARD, Fire extinguisher condition; SCBA

set condition, Antidote Kit, required PPEs as per SOP laid down.

Store officer will take sample as per sampling SOP from sampling point.

After approval of QC department unloading procedure will be allowed be started, as

per rules & guidelines.

F. Safety Measures for Drum Storage and Handling

Drums will be stored at designated location or secured in a safety storage cabinet.

Approved methods of equipping a drum and dispensing liquids from it will be

followed.

Drums, carboys and related accessories will be inspected on regular basis for

maintenance purpose.

All the vessels and equipments will be earthed properly and protected against static

electricity. Also, proper earthing facilities shall be provided for drums.

Materials will be transferred by pumping through pipeline or by vacuum, from drums.

Drums for flammable liquids will have proper closures that can withstand the

expected handling conditions without leaking.

G. Storage area Safety

Pipes and equipment shall be inspected at regular intervals.

Entry of unauthorized persons is prohibited.

Spark-resistant tools will be used.

Combustibles (wood, paper, oil, etc.) shall be kept away from spilled material.

SS storage tank will be provided as per IS code.

Dyke wall will be provided to storage tank.

Level transmitter will be provided with low level/high level auto cut-off provision.

Fire hydrant monitor with foam attachment facility will be provided.

Suitably eye-wash, showers and water showers to body is provided nearby acid and

Caustic Storage area.

FLP type pump & electrical fittings will be provided.

All storage areas shall be isolated from all sources of open flame and well posted

with' NO SMOKING' signs and will provided with adequate firefighting/extinguishing

system.

H. Ways to Minimize the Manual Handling of the Hazardous Chemicals

SOPs, work instructions will be prepared and followed.



Fork lifts will be used for unloading chemical bags, bags movements within plant, etc.

Cranes, hoists, pallet trucks, conveyors, etc. shall be used as per the requirement, to

eliminate manual handling.

Lifting tools & tackles will be used, wherever required.

Trainings will be provided to relevant staff, operators, workers for the risk associated

with manual handling of hazardous chemicals, ways to overcome those risk, etc.

I. Process Safety Measures

For the safety in production area some important critical safety measures must be provided

within the process technology/equipment itself.

The details of the general safety measures for process unit are as below;

Process parameters control will be provided vide Standard Operating Procedures.

All reaction vents will be connected to either vapor condensers system or gaseous

scrubber system.

Trained person will be engaged for handling of hazardous materials.

Proper safety precautions will be taken during handling of hazardous materials.

Further all the vessels will be examined periodically by a recognized competent

person.

All the vessels and equipments will be well earthed appropriately and well protected

against Static Electricity. Also for draining in drums proper earthing facilities have

been provided.

Reaction column pressure and temperature data will be regularly monitored and

assessment of properties of flammable chemicals will be evaluated to avoid

fire/explosion scenarios.

Temperature indicators will be provided near all reactors.

Caution note, safety posters, stickers, periodic training & updation in safety and

emergency preparedness plan will be displayed and conducted.

Total reaction will be carried out in closed jacketed vessel having cooling water

supply to control temperature in case of run-away reaction.

Emergency reactor shutdown system will be implemented.

J. Preventive safety

The safety measures in form of the general Do's & Don'ts for safety in process & other plant

area are as below:

Check VOC content for flammable and make sure that no flammable vapour

contents.

Keep proper and adequate fire extinguisher near work area.

Check all motors are disconnected and fuse pulled out before maintenance.

Work in any equipment must be conducted in presence of supervisor.

Make sure all process lines are disconnected.

Do not work on equipments without permission from plant head and maintenance

head.



Do not allow any employment without pre medical checkup or without checking

fitness.

Use proper PPE.

K. DO’s & DON’Ts

Management has listed some of the Do's & Don'ts activities to strengthen the

SAFETY AT WORK, which will be followed strictly:

For Preventive Maintenance

Do's:

Ensuring that operators/workers etc. follows the SOPs, Safety procedures &

standards, work permit system etc.

Inspection of Storage Area, Earthing & Bonding system.

Inspection of all Fire Fighting Facilities /Check Alarms operation.

Checking the availability of Spill Containment Kit.

Inspections of plant, machinery, tools, equipment, premises, work practices,

processes, procedures and general environment must be carried out for the health

and safety of plant, people and surrounding.

On-site and Offsite Emergency Plans shall be reviewed and updated, as per the

requirement.

Don’ts:

Don't allow anyone who hasn't received specific safety and operational training to get

indulge in any site activity.

Don't perform any activity without proper permit.

Don't perform your own maintenance.

Don‟t compromise on Design and Engineering part.

Don't panic if you are in a risky situation.

Don't allow spilled chemicals to drain to sewers/gutters etc.

7.5.3 Occupational Health and Safety

The main effects of chemicals especially VOCs are anticipated in proposed project. No other

source of adverse effects on occupation health & safety is likely to occur. However, MSDS of

hazardous chemicals will be prepared & made available with the management as well as

concern personnel working with the materials or area likely to be affected by the materials.

In general following are the key safety measure recommended for the proposed project.

Provision of drinking water supply for the employees as per standard of the drinking

water as per WHO guidelines.

Availability of proper sanitary facilities for the employees so that they do not suffer

from any health ailments.

Provision of all necessary equipment like portable detector, online detectors and

other laboratory equipments as proposed for regular monitoring of workplace air and

other conditions.



Establish the safety policy.

Organize training program for information on accident prevention, proper control and

maintenance of equipment, first aid training and safe material handling practices.

Monitoring of occupational hazards like noise, ventilation, chemical exposure will be

carried out at frequent intervals.

Provision of ear muffs/ ear plugs to the workers exposed to higher noise level.

Provision of proximity suits and self-breathing apparatus.

Provision and compulsory use of necessary PPEs like helmet, safety goggles, face mask,

hand gloves and safety shoes etc. for all workers.

7.6 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN (DMP)

The Disaster Management Plan (DMP) is a guide, giving detailed organizational

responsibilities, actions, reporting requirements and support resources available to ensure

effective and timely management of emergencies likely to arise from planned operations.

The DMP has been prepared for the Pesticides production plant on the basis of the Risk

Assessment and related findings covered in the foregoing topics in this report.

7.6.1 Structure

The DMP is supposed to be a dynamic, changing, document focusing on continual

improvement of emergency response planning and arrangements. A structure working on a

Plan, Do, Check and Review (PDCR) cycle has been therefore suggested. Another

advantage of doing this is to have a system that is in synchronicity with commonly used EHS

systems such as ISO: 14001 and OHSAS: 18000. The DMP is covered in further detail in the

remaining sections of this Chapter.

7.6.2 Policy

The Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) policies are to be made accessible to all

personnel at site and to other stakeholders. The policies must be framed considering

statutory compliance, stakeholder involvement, continual improvement, and management by

objectives. If required, the explanation for the EHS policies will be provided in simple

language which could be easily understood by the personnel.

7.6.3 Planning

Identification and Prevention of Possible Emergency Situations

Possible emergency situations in the fertilizer plant can broadly be classified into

unintended explosions, fire, electrical short-circuits and resultant fire, vehicle

collision, and inundation. Additional emergency situations can be developed on the

basis of audit or other procedures prior to commencement of operations.

Emergency Prevention

Some of the ways of preventing emergencies are as follows:



Preparation of a Preventive Maintenance Programme covering periodic maintenance

schedules for all the equipments, instruments and system as a whole as per

recommendations provided in the Operation and Maintenance manual supplied by

the respective manufacturers. The maintenance schedule may also incorporate

additional recommendations based on the hands-on experience of engineers gained

from working in similar plants.

Importantly, it is of great importance to collect and analyze information pertaining to

minor incidents and accidents at similar sites, as well as for recording near misses or

emergencies that were averted. This information gives an indication of how likely or

unlikely it is for the site to face actual emergencies and what should be further done

to prevent them from occurring.

Establishment of an ongoing training and evaluation programme, incorporating the

development of capabilities amongst employees about potential emergencies and

ways and means of identifying and averting the same. Most emergencies do not

occur without some incident or an abnormal situation. Hence, there is always

sometime of few seconds to few minutes to arrest an incident of abnormal situation

from turning into an emergency. This is the role of the shift in-charge who is generally

the incident controller (IC) along with his shift team.

Classification of Emergency

The Level of Emergency can be classified in three Categories, which is given in Table 7-6.

Table 7-6: Emergency Types

Classification Description Causes Applicability

Level – 1 The leakage or emergency, which is confinable within the

plant/area.

Small pipe/valve rupture or similar leakages that

do not affect outside premises.

Release of toxic chemicals for short

duration.

Small fire in the plant.

NA

Level – 2

The emergency, which is confinable within the

factory premises.

Leakage of toxic chemicals for long

duration.

Medium scale explosion confined to the factory

premises.

Medium scale fire inside the factory premises.

Phosphorus

Level – 3

The emergency, which is not confinable within the factory premises and general public in

the vicinity are likely to be affected.

Heavy / Profuse leakage of toxic / flammable

gases for a long duration.

Explosion of high magnitude affecting the

adjacent area.

NA



Major fire inside the factory premises

Emergency Plan Objectives

Specific objectives of the Emergency Response Plan are listed with regards to the

responses desired for successful management of the possible emergency situations.

Suggested Objectives would include:

To define and assess emergencies

To control and contain incidents.

To safeguard the employees.

To minimize damage to the property and/or the environment.

To inform the employees, the general public residing around the plant and the

authority on the hazards/risks assessed.

To safeguard provided residual risk, if any, and the role to be played by the

employees in the event of emergency.

To inform the state authorities like Police and Fire Departments, Mutual Aid Centers,

Medical Centers to come up for help.

To effectively rescue and to provide treatment of casualties and to count the injured.

To identify and list fatal accidents, if any.

To secure the safe rehabilitation of affected areas and to restore normally.

To provide authoritative information to the news media for the incident.

To preserve records, equipments, etc. and to organize investigation into the cause of

the emergency and to suggest preventive measures to stop its recurrence.

To ensure safety of staff and patients and resume work.

To work out a plan with all provisions to handle emergencies and to provide for

emergency.

On-Site Emergency

The On-site emergency plan: deals with, measures to prevent and control emergencies

within the factory and not affecting outside public or Environment.

Table 7-7: On-Site Emergency Planning

Sr.No. Code of Practice Objective Line of Action

1

In Case of Fire at

hazardous

chemicals

Storage area.

To deal with Fire

efficiently and quickly at

different locations in the

storage area and

electrical Panel

Any person notices any sign of fire shall

start shouting FIRE, FIRE (Aag, Aag) to

seek assistance and also immediately take

steps to give warning by blowing the siren

continuously and take steps to extinguish

the fire by using fire extinguishers available

near the site of fire.

After giving information reach the spot

remove Man & Machinery and take steps

to tackle the fire in accordance with the

firefighting instructions. Inform at security



office to get Ambulance if required.

2

In case of Heavy

Spillage, Leakage

of chemicals.

To deal with the

incidence of chemical

spillage or leakage

efficiently and

Quickly.

Any person who notices any leakage or

spillage of chemicals from storage tank,

pipe line or from any equipment should try

to warn the nearby persons and report to

the shift supervisor without any delay.

The Person should not go near the spill

unless he is wearing a proper PPE and has

been fully trained to handle the chemicals

leaks.

2 Preventive measures and plant safety

During construction

Safety precaution and preventive measures adopted in built in design, maintenance,

instrumentations, handling housekeeping, storage, loading, unloading, transportation etc.

During operation

Colour code system: Will be adopted

Work permit system: Will be adopted

Safety Audit: Internally and externally planned

Breakdown/Periodic maintenance and preventive maintenance schedule: Schedule will be

prepared and regular breakdown maintenance is carried out after getting written job order

from department where the equipment is used.

Other precautions: All other precautions will be taken (need based) from time to time.

Details of Safety Organization

1. Safety organization chart



Emergency Organization chart

Figure 7-1: Emergency Organization Chart

2. Constitution of Safety Committee

A safety committee will be constituted and it comprises equal number of members from

workmen as well as management side. Issues related to safety will be discussed in the

meeting and implemented accordingly. Plant manager acts as a chairman of the committee

and this meets as and when required.

3. Development of details inspection procedures for various equipment and system

4. Record keeping

All identified vital records of the factory will be kept in safeguard them in the event of an

emergency. Back up storage facility will be provided.



Details of training and periodic retraining programs for the personnel of safety and

fire department

Security guards who act as firemen during fire emergency are trained, retrained and

refreshed on regular basis. Safety professional is sent for external training and some training

program also conducted at works site by external experts of the field.

Details of Training and retraining programs for the workers

Training programs on safety aspects with special attention to firefighting are regular feature

of company. Plant organizes 3-4 sessions every month on safety aspects and cover good

number of workmen in these programs.

All these training programs would at least include the following:

Lectures

Seminars and workshop

Practical Exercises

Distribution and practice safety instructions

Safety quiz contests/competitions for individual as also for groups

Display of safety posters and safety slogans at convenient and conspicuous places.

Explanation of instructions (in the language easily understood by workers) about the

possible hazards involved in handling of chemicals ad methods to deal with such

hazards failing which possible emergency situation are likely to arise.

Developing safety instructions for every job and ensuring practice to these instructions/

booklets or manuals by workers.

Educating workers about the

Physical and health hazards arising out from the exposure of handling substance

Measures taken to ensure safety and control physical and health hazards.

Measures to be taken by workers to ensure safe handling, loading and unloading.

Storage and transportation of hazardous substances

Meaning of various labels and marking used on containers of hazardous substances

and to whom to report

Measures to be taken in case of any spillage or leakage.

Off-Site Emergency

The Off-site emergency plan: deals with, measures to prevent and control emergencies

affecting public and the environment outside the premises.

Arrangement made for offsite emergency

Considering distance from district Head Quarters, other nearby external emergency control

organization. Following arrangements will be arranged in consultation with DY. DISH, district

collectorate, SDM, mamlatdar.

Disclosure of information to neighboring organization and population:

Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd will prepare booklet and circulate among neighboring

organization and population containing hazardous operation and chemicals. First aid,



emergency treatment, probable types of emergencies that can arise. Preventive steps will be

taken to control emergency. Emergency warning siren code system, to make them aware in

advance. Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. will carry out group get together, acquaintance

round, meeting with neighboring public, population to train and make them aware about our

operation and preparedness.

The same groups along with external emergency control organization were invited during

mock drill, rehearsals for training and acquaintance.

Local crisis group

As per central government notification and DISH office for preparation of offsite emergency

plan and Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. will become member of local level crises group, will

set up disaster management center of industrial area using available facility of industries in

the area with facility and emergency contact phone numbers.

During emergency with in local group reach in and around industrial area any one can

contact DMC – control room situated in both the factories and manned round the clock will

initiate actions and arrange to organize resource mobilization and communication.

Communication and warning by Disaster Management Center

When a disaster occurs, the industry affected by the disaster will immediately inform the

disaster management center with all available information, the DPMC will act as per the

contingency plan and DPMC will also communicate immediately to district Collectorate. The

integration of on – site plan with district contingency plan and various functions to be carried

out are mentioned in chart OFF – SITE emergency plan as follow:

Emergency Organization Chart

Figure 7-2: Emergency Organizational Chart



Implementation

Allocation of Resources

Key Personnel are identified for carrying out specific and assigned duties in case of any kind

of emergency. All such key personnel shall be available on call even on holidays and off duty

as well.

Commander (Office Manager)

Deputy Commander (Personnel Officer)

Site Incident Controller (Shift-in-charge)

Deputy Incident Controller (Deputy to Shift-in-charge)

Other key personnel

Essential Workers

Responsibilities of Commander / Deputy Commander

To reach the identified Emergency Control Center as soon as information for incident

is provided and take charge of situation and send his deputy at the place of incident.

To activate the Emergency Preparedness Plan according to severity of situation.

To call Safety Officer and Fire Officer with all necessary resources at site of incident.

To call for outside help from State Fire Department, nearby industries, if required,

looking at magnitude of incident.

Call all key personnel and inform Doctor/Medical Center to be ready for treatment.

Commander shall deploy staff to carry out following functions.

To liaise with other departments and guide their personnel.

To supervise Assembly and Evacuation at all points.

To look after patients who are bed ridden and any casualties and give psychological

support.

To activate Assembly and Evacuation Plan, if required, as per situation by ordering

Site Incident Controller.

To inform and liaison with Chief Operating Officer, Police Department and District

Emergency Authority.

To inform all the employees and relatives of the affected employees.

Site Main Controller

(General Manager)

Incident Controller

(Shift Incharge)

Maintenance Incharge Safety Officer HR Personnel



To arrange for chronological records of emergency for future reference and

supplement the investigation of incident.

Issue authorized statements to News Media.

To ensure prompt action for preservation of evidence and arrange for video shooting/

photographs.

Deputy Commander to carry out the responsibilities of Commander in his absence

and assist him in his duties when present.

Assign Medicare and Emergency Management tasks to all persons of management

cadre

Responsibilities of Site Incident Controller / Deputy Incident Controller

To rush to the site of incident and take immediate charge.

To ensure that immediate steps as per Emergency Preparedness Plan are taken and

direct the worker staff accordingly.

To inform Commander, Deputy Commander and other key personnel for the situation

from time to time.

To blow the Siren as per situation to declare Emergency.

To supervise assembly and evacuation as per plan, if required, from the site of

incident.

To take decisions for controlling the emergency and incorporate advice given by

Commander after taking charge in Emergency Control Centre.

To ensure that casualties receive adequate attention and medical care.

To ensure accounting for the personnel present at site of incident and personnel

rescued and personnel missing.

To control traffic movement in the premises.

To arrange for relief of rescue workers and catering facilities, when emergency is

prolonged.

Deputy Incident Controller shall take charge at site of emergency in the absence of

Site Incident Controller.

When Site Incident Controller shall be present at the site of incident, Deputy Incident

Controller shall assist Site Incident Controller or take charge at another location, if

emergency exists at more than one place.

Responsibilities of Essential Workers

A task force of essential trained staff will be made available to get work done by Incident

Controllers. Such work would include:

Firefighting using portable extinguishers / hydrants (as feasible) and controlling the

spill, if any, till fire department people takes the charge.

To help the fire brigade, if required.

Emergency engineering work e.g. isolating equipment, shifting materials, urgent

repairing or replacement, electrical work etc.

Provision of emergency power, water, lighting, material etc.



Direct movement of people, equipment, special vehicle and transport to or from the

scene of the incident and provide barricade to area of incident to prevent

unauthorized trespassing.

Search, evacuation, rescue and welfare, first-aid and medical help.

Manning of assembly points to record the arrival of evacuated personnel.

Manning of outside shelters and welfare of evacuated persons there.

Assistance at casualty‟s reception areas to record details of casualties.

Assistance at communication centre to handle outgoing and incoming calls and to act

as messengers, if necessary.

Control of traffic at the premises.

7.6.4 Setting up of Emergency Infrastructure

To enable the key persons to implement the DMP, the following infrastructure will be set up:

Assembly Points

In case of emergency, the site needs to be evacuated immediately. On evacuation, the

personnel working in the plant will go to pre-assigned assembly points. The charge will be

taken by Shift-in-charge, and in his absence, a person deployed by Commander will be in

charge of respective assembly points and will supervise Assembly and Head Count. The

sign boards indicating the Assembly Point with number having relevant information will be

placed at all such point for guidance. Each assembly point will be earmarked for the

personnel from specific plant areas for assembly in the event of emergency.

Task Force of Essential Staff

A task force of essential trained staff will be made available to get the work done by

Commander. Task Force personnel will be trained to perform various tasks as mentioned

above.

Emergency Control Centre

A small separate room (generally located near Security Office at Main Entry Gate) will be

provided to facilitate Emergency Control Centre. This room will be equipped with dedicated

and direct communication facilities. The Control Centre will be situated in this area, which is

of minimum risk with immediate availability of security personnel nearby. Moreover, the area

will be on the arterial road to allow easy access by a vehicle, if other systems fail or extra

communication facilities needed to be set up. The Emergency control centre will consist of

following items:

Internal and external telephone including STD facility;

Telephone directory/ Telephone nos. of mutual aid centers.

First Aid;

Muster roll of Workers;

Identity card register;

Layout plan of the factory showing the location of hazardous materials, assembly point, and first aid centers etc.;

Map of surrounding area with Fire Extinguishers location;

M.S.D.S.;



Copy of ON SITE OFF SITE PLAN;

Stationeries like- note book, pen, pencils etc.

S.B. Apparatus;

List of Government Agencies /Local press agencies with phone No;

Sand Buckets & Hydrant Network;

Adequate numbers of PPE's.

Fire Fighting

The personnel working in the plant, in case of noticing fire, will immediately raise an alarm

and ask the nearest personnel to inform Manager. He may make an attempt to extinguish

the fire depending on intensity using a portable fire extinguisher along with other personnel

working with him. The severity of fire will be assessed and if it is likely to be severe, will take

following steps:

Call his departmental head/Shift-in-charge to inform about the incident.

Call fire tenders and mobile trailer pump from nearby fire department.

Call nearby personnel to move away from the site of incident and go to assembly points.

Arrange for switching off electricity supply to that specific area of incident.

Manager shall review the steps taken by Shift-in-charge in his capacity as COMMANDER and will reach "Emergency Control Room".

Steps in Case of Spreading of fire

Commander, after taking charge of the situation, will continuously assess the situation and if

it is not being controlled then ensure:

Ensure evacuation, in orderly fashion and assembly of all persons at the assembly points.

Arrival of fire tenders and/or Mobile Trailer Pump from outside resources.

Ensure that any vehicle parked near the fire site is taken away to safe area.

Communication System

Communication System is a Crucial Factor while handling emergency. Company has quick & effective Communication System through which, any situation, which can lead to emergency, can be informed or known to.

1. All persons working inside the plant.

2. Key Personnel outside during normal working hours & during off-duty hours.

3. Outside emergency services, Statutory and Local Authorities &

4. Neighboring facilities and public leaving in vicinity.

Each and every section, Plant & Department of the Factory will be connected by internal telephones with SMC, Supervisor or IC‟s. External Phone at Office and Residence and Mobile shall also be made available with Key Personnel and top executive of the factory. The Communication System shall begin with raising the alarm declaring the emergency, Telephone messages and Procedure to communicate the emergency to other persons & General Public.

Treatment of affected persons

Injured / Affected persons will be provided suitable first-aid treatment and sent to the

Company's Doctor and/or designated local medical center nearby in town for further

treatment depending on injury.



Patients requiring further treatment shall be sent in Ambulances to Hospitals in nearest area.

Patients suffering from minor problems will be discharged and sent home after preliminary

treatment by the Company‟s Doctor.

Post Emergency Activities

Medical check up

Medical checkup of affected persons in the incident, if any, will be carried out, and suitable

medical aid shall be provided to set right the problem.

Collection of Records

All possible evidences will be collected along with shift logs and personnel nearby or

connected with the incident will be called for narrating the details so as to facilitate finding of

the most probable and convincing cause of incident and emergency situation. The proposed

procedure will help in suggesting the remedial measures for preventing recurrence.

Inquiry

Detailed inquiry for the incident will be carried out to find out the cause, which will be in the

form of fact finding mission and recommendations made to the suitable authority.

Training

Regular training program for all the concerned personnel will be conducted to enable them to

face any type of emergency situation, be it natural disaster, fire in equipment, building or any

explosion in equipment.

Review of Emergency Performance

The site/head office management will review the findings of the audit and the non-

compliances. It will consider whether the DMP is providing adequate safety assurance to the

management, delivering performance as desired, and whether it continues to be in the spirit

of Environment, Health and Safety Policies and changing requirements. On the basis of

these, the management will record its decisions and consider modifying the DMP, as

deemed appropriate.

7.6.5 Occupational Health and Safety Programme

M/s. Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. has prepared the Occupational Health Surveillance

Programme which shall be followed right from the project construction & erection phase and

the same shall be updated for the upcoming new facility, if required.

The details of the same are described in the following sections.

1. First Aid

The First Aid kit as per Gujarat Factory Rules.



2. Plan for Periodic Medical Checkup As Per Gujarat Factory Rules.

3. Safety Trainings & Mock Drills

Safety trainings (on Safe Material Handling, First Aid, & all Safety Aspects) shall be provided

by the Safety Officers.

4. Mock Drills

To evaluate the effectiveness of emergency preparedness and to spread the awareness among employees mock drill will be carried out at the interval of every six months.

After completion of the mock drill, summary report shall be made and corrections will be

done if any weakness has been observed.

7.7 Socio Economic

The social management plan proposes to improve the quality of life of inhabitants of nearby

villages.

Social – Awareness on project benefits, gender empowerment, increases livelihood

opportunities due to proposed project and generating community participation.

Health – Awareness on health, hygiene, environmental sanitation and generic issues related

to improving quality of life with specific emphasis on potable drinking water, HIV/AIDS/STI

mitigation.

Infrastructure – Developing prioritized infrastructure facilities which are related to the

continuum of project benefits to the local communities and area as a whole.

Details on Corporate Environment Responcibility are givne in Section 6.2, Chapter 6.



8 PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 IMPROVEMENTS IN THE PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE

The proposed manufacturing unit will increase physical infrastructure in terms of new plant

and machineries, pollution control systems, basic amenities etc.

8.2 IMPROVEMENTS IN THE SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE

M/s Integrated Chemisol will carry out CER activities for betterment of the people living in

neighborhood of its units/ installation like providing sanitation facilities, improving

Anganwadi, upgrading school furniture‟s etc. to local people.

8.2.1 Education

Providing scholarships to female child/ girls in the school will encourage girls to develop

more skills and study further.

8.2.2 Water (Drinking Water Facilities)

Awareness program on conservation and safe drinking of water.

Support for water harvesting schemes.

Drinking water supply to nearby villages through tanker / tap water

8.2.3 Health

Health care center and ambulance facility is being/ will be promoted;

Awareness to improve health and hygiene standards;

Arranging medical camp and free medical check-up of villagers.

8.2.4 Employment Avenues

The company will generate direct and indirect employment. Preference will be given

to the local people for employment based on their educational qualifications and

experience.

Apprentice Training is being provided regularly.

8.3 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL SKILLED; SEMI-SKILLED AND

UNSKILLED

The unskilled employment potential will be used for site clearing during pre-construction

phase. The skilled and unskilled employees/workers will work during construction phase for

activities like excavation, site leveling, etc. Average 20-35 nos. of workers will be engaged in

installation of plant like heavy fabrication work, civil work, painting etc.



During operational phase, approx. 15 employees unskilled/skilled will be appointed on

regular/contractual basis.

8.4 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS

This manufacturing unit will increase inflow of Pesticides into local market which will be

directly beneficial to growing agriculture demand.

Local self-employment like will encouraged tea stalls, small food dhaba, tempo and

riksha walas, plumber, carpenters, wiremen etc.

Literacy level will be increased as school in the vicinity.

Medical facility will be increased and chances to save life.



9 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

9.1 PROJECT COST AND APPRAISAL

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis (CBA) is an analytical way to make an educated

decision regarding the commencement of an industrial activity or similar

trade/commercial/infrastructure activity. This involves a comparison of the costs of an action

with considerations of the benefits associated with that action. CBA assists the regulators to

evaluate the benefits and challenges imposed by the upcoming activity in commercial terms

with respective to the impact on the environmental scenario such as human wellbeing,

quality of life and environmental wellbeing.

An important component of a CBA is a base situation which is a situation when no changes

take place. All decisions are then compared to the base situation. Once the base and a

relevant time period are established, benefits and costs can be calculated in terms of human

and environmental well-being. In this case, a benefit is defined as anything that increases

human well-being, and a cost is anything that decreases it. CBA aims to maximize economic

efficiency at a point where marginal benefits and marginal costs are equal.

9.2 APPLICABILITY OF CBA AND SUMMARY

During the scoping/ ToR stage, no recommendation of environmental cost benefit analysis

was suggested by the appraisal committee. propsed manufacturing of pesticides (Aluminium

Phosphide, Zinc Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide Technical) will be carried out Plot No.

4924, Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam, District - Valsad, Gujarat. specific

environmental Cost Benefit Analysis is not carried out in preparing if this EIA report.

Environmental monitoring and management cost is adequately described in chapter 6

(Environmental Management program) and Chapter 10 (Environmental Management Plan).



10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) constitutes an important part of the EIA report.

The main purpose of EMP is to minimize the identified potential environmental impacts to be

generated from the proposed project and to mitigate the consequences. Integrated

Chemisol, on basis of the impacts identified, sets targets to reduce the negative impacts,

plans and decides action plan to achieve the target effectively and efficiently. EMP ensures

an effective implementation methodology and alternatives for mitigation measures

planned/recommended to reduce or eliminate the adverse impacts to maximum possible

extent during the operation of the proposed project.

10.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EMP)

As mentioned in earlier section, EMP is a system to address potential adverse impacts, to

instruct project proponent to introduce standards of good practice to be adopted for all

project activities.

10.1.1 Objectives of EMP

Following are long-term objectives of the Environmental Management Plan for all the

environmental attributes:

To comply with all the regulations stipulated by Central /State Pollution Control

Boards related to applicable laws.

To create good working conditions.

To encourage support and conduct developmental works for the purpose of

achieving environment standards and to improve methods of environment

management.

Streamline environmental activities to add value to efficiency and effectiveness.

To encourage and achieve highest performance and response from individual

employees and contractors.

To plan out the complete strategy to take care of stakeholder engagement.

To contribute significantly for sustainable development.

10.1.2 Environment Management Plan

Details of identified aspect due to proposed activities in the project and its management plan

are given inTable 10-1.



Table 10-1: Environmental Management Plan

Sr.No. Identified Aspect Impact Zones Mitigation Measured Effectiveness Responsibilities

Air Environment

1 Dust generation from

excavation and paving of site

Near excavation and paving sites, Near

storage area,

Regular water sprinkling will be done and Dust mask will be provided

1. Monitoring records of water quantity used in sprinkling

during pre-construction phase 2. Ensuring wearing of dust

mask by workers

1. EHS Manager

2. Safety Officer

2

Emission of HC & CO from Vehicular movement for

transportation of construction material

and waste

Within 1 Km from internal roads and

during movement of vehicles

Maintaining the speed limit of vehicle transporting construction materials. Entry only

PUC certified vehicles

1. Regular inspection for efficient working of pollution

abatement system

2. Ensuring work order has a safety compliance condition

mentioning adhering to speed limit, having valid PUC

1. EHS Manager

2. Plant head

3 Emission of P2O5 from Reactions Processes

Within 1 km near Process Area

Two stage water scrubber will be provided Ensuring proper functioning of

Two stage water scrubber

1. EHS Manager

2.Utility supervisor

4

Emission of PM, SO2 and NOx from D.G & Boiler from Operation of D.G Set, Cooling tower, Boiler, etc.

Within 1 Km near Boiler Boiler with chimney of adequate height will be

provided

Ensuring stack height at design stage and inspecting before

installation

EHS Manager

2.Utility supervisor

5

Emission of HC & CO from Vehicular movement for

transportation of raw materials, finished

goods and Industrial Waste

Within 1 Km from chimneys, internal roads and during

movement of vehicles

Maintaining the speed limit of vehicle transporting construction materials. Entry only

PUC certified vehicles

1. Regular inspection for efficient working of pollution

abatement system

2. Ensuring work order has a safety compliance condition

mentioning adhering to speed limit, having valid PUC

Maintenance in-charge

Purchase department

Safety Officer

Noise Environment




1 Noise generation Near processing unit,

transportation route and D.G.Set

Use of properly certified, tested and calibrated equipment‟s, Well maintained vehicles and properly designed equipment will be used, Accoustic enclosures would be provided

1. Ensuring work order has a safety compliance condition for

acoustic enclosure 2. Regular inspection of required certificates for equipment and vehicles

3. Ensuring workers should wear ear muff and ear plugs

1. Maintenance in-charge

2.Purchase department

3. Safety Officer

Water and Wastewater

1

Sewage generation ue to Influx of workers during construction phase and Influx of

workers during operational phase

Toilets, Washrooms in the plant

Sewage would be disposed in septic tank Reviewing cleaning of tank/pit

as per schedule Design head

2 Waste Water

Generation due to Reactions Processes

Manufacturing Unit Effluent will be treated in proposed ETP

1. Monitoring of wastewater quantity and Quality

2. Ensure characteristics of treated effluent within

prescribed norms before disposal

ETP In charge / Third Party

3

Generation of waste water from Cooling and Boiler Blow Down due to Operation of D.G Set, Cooling tower,

Boiler, etc.

Utility area Effluent will be treated in proposed ETP

4

Generation of waste water due to

Equipment and Floor Washing

Process Area Effluent will be treated in proposed ETP

5 Waste Water

Generation from Operation of ETP

ETP Area Treated water from ETP will be utilized for

scrubbing

6 Consumption of water

for Plant Operation and Domestic Uses

SW reservoir RWH practices to reduce fresh water

consumption. Check water consumption through flow meters

1. Monitoring of wastewater quantity reused by way of

statistical records

2. Monitoring reduction in

EHS Manager




consumption of fresh water

7 Mixing of process

drains with rainwater Surrounding surface

water bodies

Separate drain for storm water with parapet wall and bumps. First rain water will be reuse

in the process

1. Ensuring SWDs are always dry except during monsoon.

2. During rainy season, daily check if there is any liquid

found it will be pumped back into the system of SW

3. Periodic inspection water quality in to storm water drain and non-mixing of water with

process drain

ETP In charge / Third Party

Hazardous and Solid waste Management

1 Generation of debris

due to Excavation and paving of site

Within site premises Debris will be reused in filling low lying area Inspection for full use of debris for leveling within site Ensuring

good housekeeping

1. EHS Manager 2.Civil supervisor

2

Generation of scraps Fabrication work for erecting major plant equipment including



maintenance work

Within site premises Scraps will be handled as per rules and sold

to authorized vendors

To ensure scraps generated stored properly, maintain records and to dispose of

within stipulated time

1.EHS Manager

2.Procurement head

3

Spillage and Leakage of Raw Material/

Prduct due to Reactions Processes

Manufacturing Unit Paved area will be provided To ensure minimum spillage

and leakages and regular cleaning of the area

1.EHS Manager

2.Procurement head

4 Generation of ETP

waste due to Operation of ETP

ETP Area ETP sludge will be disposed at TSDF Site To ensure ETP sludge is disposed off at TSDF Site

EHS Manager




5

Generation of Waste Drums/Barrels/bags

and containers due to Loading and Unloading of chemicals, products

etc.

Within site premises Waste Drums/Barrels/bags and containers will

be handed over to authorized recycler To ensure waste generated stored properly, records

maintained and to be sold within stipulated time

Procurement head

6

Generation of used oil and lubricants due to


Within site premises Used oil and lubricants will be handed over to

authorized recycler

7

Generation of scraps and used spares etc.

due to Equipment maintenance

Within site premises Scraps will be handled as per rules and sold

to authorized vendors

To ensure scraps generated stored properly, maintain records and to dispose of

within stipulated time

1.EHS Manager

2.Maintenance in-charge

Land Environment

1 Removal of top soil & Land clearence due to

Site clearance Within site premises

Top soil will be stacked seprately and will be used for plantation.

To ensure separate stacking of top soil and utilizing ti for

plantation

Procurement head

2

Spillage and Leakage of Raw Material/

Prduct due to Reactions Processes

Near storage area Paved area will be provided To ensure minimum spillage

and leakages and regular cleaning of the area

1.EHS Manager

2. Civil supervisor

Social Environment (Infrastructure / Economy)

1 Increase in traffic load

during construction and operation phase

On connecting roads Controlled vehicular movement (preferably

with clearly demarcated entry/exit) with adequate supervision

Regular checkup for vehicles, their certifications, record

maintenance

Administration head

2

Employment generation during construction and operation phase

Nearby villages Positive impact Records of employment

generated Administration

head



10.2 ENVIRONMENT AMELIORATION

10.2.1 Green Belt Development

Proposed Greenbelt within Site Boundary

Project Proponent will develop green belt at suitable locations within site premises.

Consultation of Horticulture expert will be sought to make sure adequate development of

green belt. The total greenbelt area will be 500 m2. Plantation will be carried out around

periphery of the project site. Plant species suggested are provided in detail in Table 10-2

and five year greenbelt plan is provided in Table 10-3.

Table 10-2: List of plant species for Plantation in LIZ Area

S. No Scientific Name Common Name Ecological performance Locations

1 Aegle marmelos Bel CN, DC

Agriculture Hedges

2 Azardirachta indica Neem CN, OGE, DC

3 Delbergia sissoo Shisham DC, DR, FR

4 Delonix regia Gulmohar DC

5 Syzygium cumini Jamun, Jambu CN, DC

6 Terminalia catappa Desi Badam CN, OGE, DC

Ecological performance: CN –Control Noise level, OGE – Absorb Gas emission (Sexena 1991)1 and (Abbasi & Khan 2000)2, DC - Dust Controller (CPCB 2007)3.

Table 10-3: Greenbelt Development Plan

Sr. No. Description Tree Shrub

1 1st Year 25 2

2 2nd

Year 25 5

3 3rd

Year 25 5

4 4th Year 25 5

5 5th Year 25 3

Total 125 20

Budget Allocation for Greenbelt within Project Site

Considering approx. Cost @ Rs. 100 per sapling / plant, the budget for proposed Greenbelt

Development will be ~Rs. 12500 INR and cost @ Rs. 10 per sapling and 20 for Shrubs.

Recurring cost per Annum is Rs. 200 for greenbelt development.

Plantation Technique and Care

Plantation Technique

Following basic procedures need to be followed for greening the area.

1 Saxena, V.S. 1991. Afforestation as a tool for environmental improvement. In: Executive development program on greening the townships. Vaniki Prashikshan Sansthan, Jaipur. Pp 13-44.

2 Greenbelts for Pollution Control: Concepts, Design, Applications. 2000. Abbasi, S.A. and F.I. Khan. Discovery Publishing House, New Delhi.

3 Phytoremediation of particulate matter from ambient environment through dust capturing plant species. Published 2007 by Central Pollution Control Board, Ministry of Environment & Forests, Govt. of

India in Delhi.



Since the project area having poor / slightly saline soil quality, plantation of tree species

required approx. 1m3 pit for soil enrichment

Pit should be filled with imported soil with 3:1:1 the ratio of sand, silt and form yard manure

Procure well grown saplings of recommended species from the nearby Forest Department

nursery

Make 1m diameter ring bund around the planted saplings for water retention

Watering of sapling is species specific, therefore watering need to be done daily in monsoon

and once in 2 days in other seasons for a period of two years.

Monitoring Protocol

The plantations need to be managed by regular watering, soil enrichment work, applying

manure, weeding and provide proper protection.

Replacement of sapling (replanting) required whenever mortality occurs in the plantation

during the growth stage.

Plantation requires after care for a period of minimum five years till the saplings attain

matured tree stage.

Any damage to the developed greenbelt due to any natural or cattle activity should be

redeveloped and maintained by the agency.

Conservation Plan for Schedule-I Species

Conservation plan has been prepared to enhance the population status of this Schedule

species as well as overall improvement of biodiversity which will be implemented in

consultation of “Local Farmers and State Forest Department”.

Plan for Schedule-I Species

Conservation plan has been prepared to enhance the population status of this

Schedule species as well as overall improvement of biodiversity which will be

implemented in consultation of “Local Farmers and State Forest Department”.

Likely Impact Zone (LIZ) Description

Selection of Plant Species

All the facts considered for species selection are same as facts considered for

greenbelt development within project site premises.

Habitat Improvement through Plantation in LIZ

In identified LIZ area, plantation will be carried out on the agriculture hedges.

Following budget is allocated for additional greenbelt, habitat improvement and

conservation of threatened species of the study area.

Multi-layered plantation comprising of medium height trees (6-8 m height) and shrubs (3-5m

height) will be proposed for the green belt. The plan comprises of a five year program from

1st year to 5th year for greenbelt development.



(i) Plan for 1st year (Trees/Saplings Plantation)

The work plan for the first year, digging of pits and soil conditioning

Planting of saplings

Surveillance maintenance and irrigation of the saplings to achieve maximum survival

(ii) Plan for 2nd year (Additional Trees/Saplings Plantation + Replacing Dead Trees)

The work plan for the second and third year

Maintenance and irrigation of species planted earlier.

Survey of the area to identify the locations for replantation and causality replacement

Removal of dead trees and replantation based on specific location requirements

(iii) Plan for 3rd and 4th year (Replacing Dead Trees + Maintaining the Greenbelt)

The work plan for the fourth year

Maintenance and irrigation of species planted earlier.

Survey of the area to identify the locations for replantation and causality replacement

Maintenance and irrigation of plants to achieve the targeted rate at 100%.

(iv) The work plan for subsequent years comprises (Maintenance)

Maintenance of plantation.

Clearing of afforested areas to remove undesirable species

Replacement of dead and diseased/malformed species with new ones

Table 10-4: Budget for Additional Greenbelt outside premises / Habitat Improvement Programme

S. No

Work or Activity

1st year 2nd year 3rd year 4th year 5th year Budget (INR)

1 Plantation on agriculture hedges will be carried out up to five years (Approx. Cost @ Rs. 100 per

plant).

Saplings Required 25 25 25 25 25 12500/-

Amount 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500

Total Budget 12500/-

(Twelve Thousand Five Hundred Rupees Only)

10.2.2 Concept of Waste Minimization, Recycle, Reuse / Recover, Energy

Conservation and Natural Resource Conservation

Waste Minimization

Cleaner Production (CP) activities & techniques which can be implemented by minor

change in process, handling practice of raw material as well as wastes to be

generated, elimination of pollutants at or near the source etc.

A designated raw material storage area shall be provided for better handling.

Proper handling, loading and unloading practices shall be followed for reducing

material wastage.

Energy Conservation

Regular energy conservation initiatives will be taken to reduce energy consumption



Energy efficient machineries, fixtures and equipment will be used during the

construction and operation phase as far as possible.

Periodic monitoring of unit/plant/department wise for energy consumption

10.2.3 RAIN WATER HARVESTING SCHEME

Rainwater harvesting is a mechanism involved in collecting, storing and using rainwater

when it is most needed. A rainwater harvesting system comprises of various stages i.e.

transporting rainwater through pipes or drains, filtration, and storage in tanks for reuse or

recharge.

Based on the long term IMD Data for Valsad District, calculations are done accordingly and

shown in Table below:

Annual Rainfall intensity = 1500 mm (0.15 m)

Table 10-5: Rainwater harvesting calculations

Final Catchment Area Run-off

Coefficient

Avg. Rainfall

Intensity

(per annum)

Rainwater Available

(per annum)

Type m2 m

3

Roof Top 815 0.85 0.15 104.03

Open Area 951.25 0.3 0.15 42.8

Greenbelt Area 500 0.3 0.15 22.5

Total 2266.25 - - 169.33

Calculations are based on methodology given in “Concepts and Practices for Rainwater

Harvesting by CPCB-2001”.

Total Run-off Generated: 169.33 m3/ annum

Hence, 169.33 m3/ annum much amount of rainwater will be available for harvesting.

Company will be self-sufficient in water requirement.

10.3 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH OF WORKERS

10.3.1 Noise

Noise will be regularly monitored at plant boundary and near high noise generating

equipment against workplace monitoring requirement as per Factory Act.

All Workmen working in high noise areas are/ will be provided with ear plug, ear muff etc.

where noise levels excess of 80 dbA.

10.3.2 Heat

The project does not envisage conditions that could lead to excess heating. Consequently,

special requirements for protection against heat stress are not anticipated. However, the

following shall be carried out:

Ventilation shall be provided to take care of heat evacuation. An air-exchange ratio of at

least 6 will be maintained at all times



Drinking water availability shall be ensured at several locations within the plant to ensure

workers have easy access to the same

In case of occasional handling of heated equipment or materials, suitable PPEs such as

heat resistant gloves will be used.

10.3.3 Dust, other Chemicals and Metals being suspended in the Environment

Workmen are/ will be provided with appropriate PPEs, like nose musk / nose respirator,

gloves, helmets, protective uniform and clothing, eye protections etc.

10.3.4 Occupational Hazards specific Pre-Placement and Periodical Health

Checkup

As per policy and norms all of the workmen will be put to medical examination periodically as

per Factory Act and based on the medical report actions is/ shall be taken.

10.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL

The company will have a system of reporting of non-compliances / violations of

environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and / or stakeholders at

large. The reporting mechanism is detailed in this section.

Organogram of environment management cell is as shown in Figure 10-1.

Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring that mitigative measures are

implemented and their effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA.

Figure 10-1: Organogram of Environmental Management Cell



11 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

11.1 INTRODUCTION

Integrated Chemisol Pvt. Ltd. proposes to manufacture pesticides (Aluminium Phosphide,

Zinc Phosphide, Magnesium Phosphide Technical Plot No. 4924, Notified Industrial Area,

GIDC Sarigam, District - Vaalsad, Gujarat

The proposed project falls under 5 (b), category A “Pesticides industry and pesticide specific

intermediates (excluding formulations) as per Schedule in EIA Notification 2006, as

amended till date.

11.1.1 Proposed Project

S. No.


transportaion



Project description

Propose project is located Notified Industrial Area, GIDC Sarigam. The proposed project site

lies on 20°17'12.71"N Latitude and 72°50'45.82"E Longitude, cost of the project is ~INR 6

Cr. Power demand will be 125 KVA, sourced from DGVCL, fresh water requirement will be

6.5 KLD, sourced from GIDC, Vapi and manpower will be 75 numbers.

Process Description

The Company is manufacturing Pesticides a state of the art technology. Project Proponent

proposes to adopt successful best process technology for process. The company will be

using modern machine and equipment‟s with emphasis on waste minimization techniques.

Details description of process is provided in Chapter 2.

11.1.2 Air Emissions & Control

Point Source emissions from flue gas stacks attached to steam Boiler are PM, SO2 & NOx.

Adequate height of chimney will be provided. Process gas stacks attached with two stage

water scrubber.

Noise: Noise generation sources are: Compressors, Pumps and vehicular movement for

transportation of raw material and product.

11.1.3 Wastewater Treatment &Disposal

Total Industrial wastewater generation will be 2.8 KLD mainly from boiler blow down;

cooling tower blow down and floor washing. The effluent will be treated into ETP. First

waste water will be collected, pH will be balanced and then the wastewater will be filtered



and utilized for scrubber. Thus there will be no discharge of any industrial effluent. The

proposed unit will be a Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD) Unit.

Domestic waste water (2 KL/day) will be passed through Septic Tank/Soak Pit.

11.1.4 Hazardous& Other Solid Waste

Hazardous Waste includes Used Oil, Discarded Containers, ETP Waste. This waste will

be disposed of as per Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary

Movement) Rules, 2016.

Domestic Waste: Paper waste will be handed over to scrap dealers and municipal waste

will be sent to nearest municipal waste collection site.

Small amount of e-waste and scrap will be handed over to authorized scrap dealers.

11.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

11.2.1 Study Period, Area & Monitoring/Sampling Locations

Period of the baseline study was October 2018 to December 2018 and study was conducted

within 10 km radius from the project site.

Total eight ambient air samples, seven ground water samples, four soil samples and six

surface water samples were collected. Noise monitoring was carried out at eight different

locations.

Summary of results is as under:

11.2.2 Land Use and Land Cover

The area surrounding the project site is largely an agriculture land area like Orchad, Crop

Land and Fallow Land are covering around 35.38%, 6.08% and 10.15% respectively of the

total study area. Water body is covering around 8.86 % of the total study area. Range Land

like Grass Land and Scrub Land are covering around 11.56% and 2.67% respectively of the

total study area. Forest area like PF and RF are covering around 0.45% & 6.41%

respectively of the total study area. Barren land like waste land and Muddy are covering

around 11.76% & 1.18% respectively of the total study area. Settlement is covering around

5.31% of the total study area

11.2.3 Micro Meteorology

Micrometeorological data were collected by using the weather station as per CPCB guideline

which was installed near project site. Following are the observations:

Minimum temperature was recorded 13.2oC on 29th Dec 2018 and maximum temperature

was recorded as 38.1oC on 02nd Oct 2018.

During the study period minimum Humidity was recorded 22% on 22th Oct 2018 and 19th

Dec 2018 and maximum Humidity was recorded as 95% on 11h Dec 2018.

Wind speed was observed from 0.1 to 8.0 km/hr in the month of Oct 2018, from 0.1 to

7.0 km/hr in the month of Nov 2018 and from 0.1 to 10.0 km/hr in the Month of Dec 2018.



11.2.4 Ambient Air Quality

The broad findings of the ambient air quality monitoring are:

Results were compared with the standard for ambient air quality monitoring as per

the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF & CC).

During the study PM10 was observed in the range of 61.9 – 86.1 µg/m3. Maximum

concentration of PM10 was found at sarai village.

PM2.5 was observed in the range of 32.0 – 47.1 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of

PM2.5 was found at project site.

SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 9.4 -17.6 µg/m3, which is well within

the standard limit.

NOx concentration in was observed in the range of 16.2- 23.0 µg/m3, which is well

within the standard limit.

Monitoring and analysis was also carried out for CO. Result for the CO was found

well within the norms.

11.2.5 Noise Level

The broad findings of the noise level monitoring are:

Equivalent noise level was recorded 56.8 dB (A) at Project Site and it is varies from

49.8 to 51.1 dB (A) in residential area during day time.

Equivalent noise level was recorded 51.6 dB (A) at Project Site and it is 42.1 to 43.1

dB (A) in residential area during night time.

Noise level monitoring was carried out 1 meter away from Bhilad-Sarigam-Fansa

Road near project site and equivalent noise level was recorded 77.1 dB (A) during

day time and 73.5 dB (A) during night time.

Noise level monitoring was carried out 1 meter away from NH-8 near Dhanoli village

and equivalent noise level was recorded 75.4 dB (A) during day time and 68.8 dB

(A) during night time.

11.2.6 Soil Quality

Based on the soil analysis for its physical and chemical properties, it is observed that:

The soils are categorized as clay loam to clay based on different soil separates

(sand, silt and clay). They have moderate water holding capacity (28.8 to 35.6 %),

but poor drainage capacity as texture is clay loam to clay as nearly 77 % is silt + clay.

The soil is categorized as deep black having > 1m depth and lower layers are having

calcium nodules.

The pH of the soil samples narrowly ranged from 7.48 to 7.76 during the study

period. The soil EC also varied from 0.86 to1.18 dS/m and ESP ranged from 11.6 to

15.1. These parameters indicate that soils are neutral to alkaline in reaction, saline

(EC > 0.8 dS/m), but normal to sodic as ESP is exceeding 15 in one out of four

samples.

Among exchangeable basic cations predominance of calcium (25.4 to 27.4 meq/100

g soil) was seen followed by Mg (6.8 –8.6 meq/100 g soil), Na (4.5 to 6.6 meq/100 g

soil) and K (1.2 to 2.0 meq/100 g soil). The loss on ignition (0.2 to 0.6 % OC) indicate



that soils are low (<0.5 % OC) to medium (> 0.5 – 0.75 % OC) in organic carbon

status. This shows that soils are low to medium in nitrogen status.

11.2.7 Groundwater Quality

The test results were compared with the Drinking Water Specification: IS: 10500, 1992

(Reaffirmed 2012) and it is summarized as under:

pH was observed in the range of 7.14 – 7.32 which meets with desirable norms.

Total dissolved solid were recorded in the range of 602 to 924 mg/L with minimum at

Punat village and maximum at Chandor village.

Total hardness was in the range of 384-584 mg/L with minimum at Punat village &


Total Alkalinity was found in the range of 292-502 mg/L with minimum at Punat village &


Iron was found in the range of 0.14-0.28 mg/L with minimum at Malav village and

maximum at Punat village.

As microbiological parameters MPN analysis was also carried out and it was found Nil.

11.2.8 Surface water Quality

Samples were collected from 3 locations as most of the ponds were dried up. Following are

the findings:

During the analysis pH of the samples was found in the range of 7.96-8.02.

TDS analysis was also carried out for surface water sample and it was found in the

range of 186-354 mg/L.

DO measured during analysis was found in the range of 4.7-4.9 mg/L.

COD & BOD analysis was also carried out during the study period and it was found

more than desirable value for drinking water.

MPN test was also carried out for this surface water sample and it was found positive.

It indicates towards the fecal contamination in surface water body.

11.2.9 Marine water Quality







11.2.10 Ecology and Biodiversity

Project Site / Core Zone:

The project site is having thick trees plantation covering area of 500 m2 comprising of various

local trees and shrubs.

Buffer Zone/Study area:

All the common species of flora and fauna were observed for flat terrain during the survey.








11.2.11 Socio Economic

The summary of the social survey for the study area is provided as below:

Population and its distribution: There are 41 villages, with a total population of 2,22,722

persons.

Sex ratio: It is in the range of 629-1080 (number of females per 1000 males) with lowest

in Sarigam and highest in Punat.

Literacy Rate: Among all the villages of study area Nanakwada (CT) having high literacy

rate i.e. 86.98 %. There is not much difference between female literacy rate and male

literacy rate in the study region. Female literacy rate is an important indicator for social

change.

Economic Aspects: Pali Karambeli has significant employment i.e. 57.05 % as main

workers, while the lowest employment as main workers in Nagwas i.e. 27.6%. Almost all

the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers

11.3 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES


Dispersion modeling (using “AERMOD” modeling software) was carried out:



the SW direction.



the West direction.





the SW direction.


Due to the proposed activities the noise will be generated from Vehicular movement and

heavy fabrication work during construction phase and from Compressors, Pumps and

vehicular movement for products transportation during operation phase for raw material and

products transportation during operation phase. This noise will be very negligible.

Control measures will be provided. These include passive and active controls such as noise

barriers (hollow blocks) or acoustic enclosure. Where this is not possible, control measures

in the form of use of suitable PPE (ear muffs or ear plugs) will be provided.


Surface Water: The proposed unit does not involve disposal of effluent on CETP and Land

directly. The effluent will be treated into ETP and then utilized for scrubber. The domestic

wastewater generated will be disposed off into soak pits / septic tank.

Ground Water: Impact on groundwater environment is envisaged due to project activities

due to mixing of process water with storm water drains.

Mitigation measures suggested are:

Separate drain for storm water with parapet wall and bumps. First rain water will be

reuse in the process.

11.3.4 Land Environment

Land clearance will be done leading to removal of top soil which will be used for greenbelt

management.

11.3.5 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

Excavation and paving activity involve for proposed project will be utilized for leveling of low

lying area. The scraps generated during fabrication will be given to scrap vendors.

During operation phase the ETP waste Will be disposed off into TSDF, Vapi through SIA,

Sarigam, Used oil Will be sold to Registered re-processers and Discarded containers Will be

sold to authorized recycler and Phosporic acid will be Sell to authorized users having

permission under Rule 9 of the H/W rules 2016.

11.3.6 Biological Environment

Removal of common site specific floral species from project site will not have significant or

permanent impact on the habitat structure of associated faunal diversity.

As the emissions from the plant are regulated and minimal with respect to the specified

norms, and with a very healthy greenbelt proposed at the site in the form of several species,

it then follows that the biological environment will be protected.



11.3.7 Green Belt Development

The total greenbelt area will be 500 m2. Plantation will be carried out around periphery of the

project site. Considering, greenbelt area, project site will have plantation of around 125 trees

and 20 shrub of local species like Bel, Neem, Shesham, Peepal etc. Plantation will be

carried out in around periphery and within the project site.

11.3.8 Socio-Economic Environment

Assessment of socio-economic and sociological impact including health impacts to

surrounding population. The proposed activities shall generate indirect employment in the

region due to the requirement of workers in trail making, supply of raw material, auxiliary and

ancillary works, which would marginally improve the economic status of the people.

11.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

The following will be monitored on a regular basis during operation phase to ensure that a

high level of environmental performance is maintained:

Ambient air monitoring of PM10, PM2.5,, SO2 and NOx will be carried out during the

operational phase within site premises and nearby villages, location of downwind

direction, once every season

Groundwater sample from site or nearby location once every season

Post project sampling and effect on baseline data generated during construction and

operation;

The general effectiveness of pollution control measures shall also be monitored

11.5 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

11.5.1 Socio Economic Development Activities

Socio-economic development activities towards community welfare in the field of education,

health care services, sanitation, & infrastructure development programs in the study area will

be based on the need of the community.

11.5.2 Risk Assessment

Risk Assessment has been analyzed using methodology called HIRA-Hazards Identification

& Risk Assessment for Construction phase and Storage and Handling of various Chemicals

during operation phase. Major hazards identified and related risk involved (impact) during

construction phase are mainly related to health issues, injuries, fall, accidents etc. of

workers. Mitigation measures suggested are by providing proper PPEs and adequate safety

measures.

Hazard identified for operation phase is mainly related to storage and handling of toxic

chemicals and solid chemicals. Proper handling and storage procedures will be followed to

avoid any kind of accidents.



Occupational health and safety

It will be ensured that all workers will wear ear plugs, muffs etc. The project does not

envisage conditions that could lead to excess heating. However, it will be ensured that

proper ventilation of air will be provided for heat evacuation, drinking water availability at

several locations and providing suitable PPEs for handing of heated equipment.

11.6 PROJECT BENEFITS

Due to establishment of the proposed project following benefits are envisaged for the locals

and country:

The proposed project will provide potential growth opportunity for the on-going

business of the company.

Local market is also showing strong growth potential.

It will increase the demand of local employment.

The company will employ about 75 people to fulfill its need to handle the plant.

Local people will get some contracts of supply and services to get indirect income.

Company will contribute in improving education and health facilities in nearby area.

11.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Environmental Management Plan for suggested mitigation measures and monitoring plan

will include:

Review of Compliance of EMP, EC & statutory conditions in the management

meeting

Preparation and timely submission of required statutory reports & Cess

Proper hazardous waste inventory accounting by HSE department

Monitoring for reduction in air emissions generation of hazardous waste quantity by

concerned department heads as per QMS developed by integrated chemisol Pvt. Ltd.

Reviewing time bound action plan for imparting training to drivers and availability of

TREM cards

Reviewing annual performance of EHS in board meeting

An Environmental Management Cell with adequate professional expertise and resources

shall be established to discharge responsibilities related to environmental management

including statutory compliance, pollution prevention, environmental monitoring, etc.

11.8 CONCLUSION

Based on the EIA study conducted in Post Monson Season of 2018 as per terms of

reference given by EAC dated 22th July, 2018 the following highlights emerge:

Proposed project is located in Notified Industrial Area and would not have any

considerable impact on environment.



There will be negligible pollution potential on air, water and noise environment,

which, with the implementation of the mitigation measures and EMP, can be reduced

considerably.

The proposed project activities will have positive beneficial effect on the local

population, economic output and other related facilities viz. employment,

development of business, transportation etc.

Rapid risk assessment including emergency response plan and DMP has been

prepared to handle any sort of emergencies.

Looking to the overall project justification, process, pollution potential and pollution

prevention measures /technologies installed by proponent, environmental management

activities of proponent; the proposed project would be environmentally acceptable, in

compliance with environmental legislation and standards.



12 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

12.1 GENERAL

Integrated Chemisol has appointed Eco Chem Sales & Services (ECSS) for carrying out this

Environmental Impact Assessment Study as per the EIA notification, 2006 as amended till

date. ECSS has approved EIA coordinators and Field Area Experts for undertaking

Environmental and related studies in twenty two (22) approved sectors by NABET, Quality

Council of India, New Delhi.

12.2 BRIEF RESUME AND NATURE OF CONSULTANCY

ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICES (ECSS) is one of the leading companies in the field of

Environmental Consultancy Service providers in India. We are NABET Accredited consultant

for conducting Environmental Impact Assessment Studies (EIA) and obtaining

Environmental Clearances. We also take up services which include and are not limited to

Environment Monitoring and Testing, Environment Audit, Risk Assessment Studies, Turnkey

solutions, Operation and Maintenance contracts and obtaining various statutory clearances

from Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) and State Pollution

Control Boards. ECSS also has branch offices in Vapi, Dahej and Vadodara, Gujarat.

The accreditation certificate number NABET/EIA/1720/RA 051 is valid up to 3rd Feb. 2020.

Copy of NABET certificate is attached with EIA report.

12.3 TEAM MEMBER FOR EIA REPORT

Table 12-1: EIA Team Member

Name of Internal Team

Member Activity / Area

Involvement

Actual Work Performed

Under Approved Expert

Jagdish Rathi Quality Check

Project planning; Understanding of project; Site visit; Discussion with client; Guidance in writing and modification in Contents; Impact

Assessment; Review of EIA/EMP report.

EC

Disha Patel EIA Report writing (TM)

Team Member- Coordination for data collection, data analysis, coordination with

FAEs, various chapter preparations, compiling the primary & secondary data into

EIA report.

EIA

Jeet Shah Land use (LU) Team Member- Assisting in coordination for

data collection and data analysis, Assisting in map preparation & report writing

FAE-LU

Disha Patel Water

Pollution, Prevention and

Team Member- Identification of surface water sampling stations; water requirement /

demand calculation; identification of impacts and relevant mitigation measures; assisting

FAE-WP



Name of Internal Team

Member Activity / Area

Involvement

Actual Work Performed

Under Approved Expert

Control (WP) in preparation of management plan and report writing

Air Pollution (AP)

Team Member- Identification of sampling location, - Assistance in Identification of

impacts & mitigation measures,

FAE-AP

Nazneen Mansuri

Solid & Hazardous

Waste Management

(SHW)

Team Member- Assisting in solid waste generation calculation, preparing solid waste

disposal plan, assistance in FAE

Report writing, assisting in identifying hazardous waste generation sources and

preparing environmental management plan.

FAE-SHW

Mr. Vaibhav Rana

Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling

&prediction (AQ)

Team Member- Data collection, assistance in report preparation to FAE

FAE-AQ

Ms. Priyanka Verma

Noise & Vibration (NV)

Team Member-Assistance in noise monitoring and report writing

FAE-NV

Ms. Kanchan Prabha

Rathoure

Socio-economic (SE)

Team Member-Assisting in survey, data interpretation and report writing

FAE-SE

Mr. Deep Kumar

Risk Assessment &

Hazard Management

(RH)

Team Member- Assistance in Identification of impacts & mitigation measures, safety during

construction and operational phase and report writing

FAE-RH

12.4 LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING AND

OTHER ANALYSIS

ECSS has NABL accredited Laboratory with Certificate No. T – 6603, dated 26/10/2017 valid

up to 25/10/2019 for testing of Water, Wastewater, Sewage, Air, Noise and Soil.

Documents

Proposed Project for the Manufacture of Pesticides (Aluminium … · 2019-03-08 · EIA-EMP Report for Proposed Project for the Manufacture of Pesticides (Aluminium Phosphide, Zinc